Commit | Line | Data |
---|---|---|
920dae64 AT |
1 | =head1 NAME |
2 | ||
3 | Config - access Perl configuration information | |
4 | ||
5 | =head1 SYNOPSIS | |
6 | ||
7 | use Config; | |
8 | if ($Config{usethreads}) { | |
9 | print "has thread support\n" | |
10 | } | |
11 | ||
12 | use Config qw(myconfig config_sh config_vars config_re); | |
13 | ||
14 | print myconfig(); | |
15 | ||
16 | print config_sh(); | |
17 | ||
18 | print config_re(); | |
19 | ||
20 | config_vars(qw(osname archname)); | |
21 | ||
22 | ||
23 | =head1 DESCRIPTION | |
24 | ||
25 | The Config module contains all the information that was available to | |
26 | the C<Configure> program at Perl build time (over 900 values). | |
27 | ||
28 | Shell variables from the F<config.sh> file (written by Configure) are | |
29 | stored in the readonly-variable C<%Config>, indexed by their names. | |
30 | ||
31 | Values stored in config.sh as 'undef' are returned as undefined | |
32 | values. The perl C<exists> function can be used to check if a | |
33 | named variable exists. | |
34 | ||
35 | =over 4 | |
36 | ||
37 | =item myconfig() | |
38 | ||
39 | Returns a textual summary of the major perl configuration values. | |
40 | See also C<-V> in L<perlrun/Switches>. | |
41 | ||
42 | =item config_sh() | |
43 | ||
44 | Returns the entire perl configuration information in the form of the | |
45 | original config.sh shell variable assignment script. | |
46 | ||
47 | =item config_re($regex) | |
48 | ||
49 | Like config_sh() but returns, as a list, only the config entries who's | |
50 | names match the $regex. | |
51 | ||
52 | =item config_vars(@names) | |
53 | ||
54 | Prints to STDOUT the values of the named configuration variable. Each is | |
55 | printed on a separate line in the form: | |
56 | ||
57 | name='value'; | |
58 | ||
59 | Names which are unknown are output as C<name='UNKNOWN';>. | |
60 | See also C<-V:name> in L<perlrun/Switches>. | |
61 | ||
62 | =back | |
63 | ||
64 | =head1 EXAMPLE | |
65 | ||
66 | Here's a more sophisticated example of using %Config: | |
67 | ||
68 | use Config; | |
69 | use strict; | |
70 | ||
71 | my %sig_num; | |
72 | my @sig_name; | |
73 | unless($Config{sig_name} && $Config{sig_num}) { | |
74 | die "No sigs?"; | |
75 | } else { | |
76 | my @names = split ' ', $Config{sig_name}; | |
77 | @sig_num{@names} = split ' ', $Config{sig_num}; | |
78 | foreach (@names) { | |
79 | $sig_name[$sig_num{$_}] ||= $_; | |
80 | } | |
81 | } | |
82 | ||
83 | print "signal #17 = $sig_name[17]\n"; | |
84 | if ($sig_num{ALRM}) { | |
85 | print "SIGALRM is $sig_num{ALRM}\n"; | |
86 | } | |
87 | ||
88 | =head1 WARNING | |
89 | ||
90 | Because this information is not stored within the perl executable | |
91 | itself it is possible (but unlikely) that the information does not | |
92 | relate to the actual perl binary which is being used to access it. | |
93 | ||
94 | The Config module is installed into the architecture and version | |
95 | specific library directory ($Config{installarchlib}) and it checks the | |
96 | perl version number when loaded. | |
97 | ||
98 | The values stored in config.sh may be either single-quoted or | |
99 | double-quoted. Double-quoted strings are handy for those cases where you | |
100 | need to include escape sequences in the strings. To avoid runtime variable | |
101 | interpolation, any C<$> and C<@> characters are replaced by C<\$> and | |
102 | C<\@>, respectively. This isn't foolproof, of course, so don't embed C<\$> | |
103 | or C<\@> in double-quoted strings unless you're willing to deal with the | |
104 | consequences. (The slashes will end up escaped and the C<$> or C<@> will | |
105 | trigger variable interpolation) | |
106 | ||
107 | =head1 GLOSSARY | |
108 | ||
109 | Most C<Config> variables are determined by the C<Configure> script | |
110 | on platforms supported by it (which is most UNIX platforms). Some | |
111 | platforms have custom-made C<Config> variables, and may thus not have | |
112 | some of the variables described below, or may have extraneous variables | |
113 | specific to that particular port. See the port specific documentation | |
114 | in such cases. | |
115 | ||
116 | =head2 _ | |
117 | ||
118 | =over 4 | |
119 | ||
120 | =item C<_a> | |
121 | ||
122 | From F<Unix.U>: | |
123 | ||
124 | This variable defines the extension used for ordinary library files. | |
125 | For unix, it is F<.a>. The F<.> is included. Other possible | |
126 | values include F<.lib>. | |
127 | ||
128 | =item C<_exe> | |
129 | ||
130 | From F<Unix.U>: | |
131 | ||
132 | This variable defines the extension used for executable files. | |
133 | C<DJGPP>, Cygwin and F<OS/2> use F<.exe>. Stratus C<VOS> uses F<.pm>. | |
134 | On operating systems which do not require a specific extension | |
135 | for executable files, this variable is empty. | |
136 | ||
137 | =item C<_o> | |
138 | ||
139 | From F<Unix.U>: | |
140 | ||
141 | This variable defines the extension used for object files. | |
142 | For unix, it is F<.o>. The F<.> is included. Other possible | |
143 | values include F<.obj>. | |
144 | ||
145 | =back | |
146 | ||
147 | =head2 a | |
148 | ||
149 | =over 4 | |
150 | ||
151 | =item C<afs> | |
152 | ||
153 | From F<afs.U>: | |
154 | ||
155 | This variable is set to C<true> if C<AFS> (Andrew File System) is used | |
156 | on the system, C<false> otherwise. It is possible to override this | |
157 | with a hint value or command line option, but you'd better know | |
158 | what you are doing. | |
159 | ||
160 | =item C<afsroot> | |
161 | ||
162 | From F<afs.U>: | |
163 | ||
164 | This variable is by default set to F</afs>. In the unlikely case | |
165 | this is not the correct root, it is possible to override this with | |
166 | a hint value or command line option. This will be used in subsequent | |
167 | tests for AFSness in the Perl configure and test process. | |
168 | ||
169 | =item C<alignbytes> | |
170 | ||
171 | From F<alignbytes.U>: | |
172 | ||
173 | This variable holds the number of bytes required to align a | |
174 | double-- or a long double when applicable. Usual values are | |
175 | 2, 4 and 8. The default is eight, for safety. | |
176 | ||
177 | =item C<ansi2knr> | |
178 | ||
179 | From F<ansi2knr.U>: | |
180 | ||
181 | This variable is set if the user needs to run ansi2knr. | |
182 | Currently, this is not supported, so we just abort. | |
183 | ||
184 | =item C<aphostname> | |
185 | ||
186 | From F<d_gethname.U>: | |
187 | ||
188 | This variable contains the command which can be used to compute the | |
189 | host name. The command is fully qualified by its absolute path, to make | |
190 | it safe when used by a process with super-user privileges. | |
191 | ||
192 | =item C<api_revision> | |
193 | ||
194 | From F<patchlevel.U>: | |
195 | ||
196 | The three variables, api_revision, api_version, and | |
197 | api_subversion, specify the version of the oldest perl binary | |
198 | compatible with the present perl. In a full version string | |
199 | such as F<5.6.1>, api_revision is the C<5>. | |
200 | Prior to 5.5.640, the format was a floating point number, | |
201 | like 5.00563. | |
202 | ||
203 | F<perl.c>:incpush() and F<lib/lib.pm> will automatically search in | |
204 | F<$sitelib/.>. for older directories back to the limit specified | |
205 | by these api_ variables. This is only useful if you have a | |
206 | perl library directory tree structured like the default one. | |
207 | See C<INSTALL> for how this works. The versioned site_perl | |
208 | directory was introduced in 5.005, so that is the lowest | |
209 | possible value. The version list appropriate for the current | |
210 | system is determined in F<inc_version_list.U>. | |
211 | ||
212 | C<XXX> To do: Since compatibility can depend on compile time | |
213 | options (such as bincompat, longlong, etc.) it should | |
214 | (perhaps) be set by Configure, but currently it isn't. | |
215 | Currently, we read a hard-wired value from F<patchlevel.h>. | |
216 | Perhaps what we ought to do is take the hard-wired value from | |
217 | F<patchlevel.h> but then modify it if the current Configure | |
218 | options warrant. F<patchlevel.h> then would use an #ifdef guard. | |
219 | ||
220 | =item C<api_subversion> | |
221 | ||
222 | From F<patchlevel.U>: | |
223 | ||
224 | The three variables, api_revision, api_version, and | |
225 | api_subversion, specify the version of the oldest perl binary | |
226 | compatible with the present perl. In a full version string | |
227 | such as F<5.6.1>, api_subversion is the C<1>. See api_revision for | |
228 | full details. | |
229 | ||
230 | =item C<api_version> | |
231 | ||
232 | From F<patchlevel.U>: | |
233 | ||
234 | The three variables, api_revision, api_version, and | |
235 | api_subversion, specify the version of the oldest perl binary | |
236 | compatible with the present perl. In a full version string | |
237 | such as F<5.6.1>, api_version is the C<6>. See api_revision for | |
238 | full details. As a special case, 5.5.0 is rendered in the | |
239 | old-style as 5.005. (In the 5.005_0x maintenance series, | |
240 | this was the only versioned directory in $sitelib.) | |
241 | ||
242 | =item C<api_versionstring> | |
243 | ||
244 | From F<patchlevel.U>: | |
245 | ||
246 | This variable combines api_revision, api_version, and | |
247 | api_subversion in a format such as 5.6.1 (or 5_6_1) suitable | |
248 | for use as a directory name. This is filesystem dependent. | |
249 | ||
250 | =item C<ar> | |
251 | ||
252 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
253 | ||
254 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
255 | full pathname (if any) of the ar program. After Configure runs, | |
256 | the value is reset to a plain C<ar> and is not useful. | |
257 | ||
258 | =item C<archlib> | |
259 | ||
260 | From F<archlib.U>: | |
261 | ||
262 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants | |
263 | to put architecture-dependent public library files for $package. | |
264 | It is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/lib>. | |
265 | Programs using this variable must be prepared to deal | |
266 | with filename expansion. | |
267 | ||
268 | =item C<archlibexp> | |
269 | ||
270 | From F<archlib.U>: | |
271 | ||
272 | This variable is the same as the archlib variable, but is | |
273 | filename expanded at configuration time, for convenient use. | |
274 | ||
275 | =item C<archname64> | |
276 | ||
277 | From F<use64bits.U>: | |
278 | ||
279 | This variable is used for the 64-bitness part of $archname. | |
280 | ||
281 | =item C<archname> | |
282 | ||
283 | From F<archname.U>: | |
284 | ||
285 | This variable is a short name to characterize the current | |
286 | architecture. It is used mainly to construct the default archlib. | |
287 | ||
288 | =item C<archobjs> | |
289 | ||
290 | From F<Unix.U>: | |
291 | ||
292 | This variable defines any additional objects that must be linked | |
293 | in with the program on this architecture. On unix, it is usually | |
294 | empty. It is typically used to include emulations of unix calls | |
295 | or other facilities. For perl on F<OS/2>, for example, this would | |
296 | include F<os2/os2.obj>. | |
297 | ||
298 | =item C<asctime_r_proto> | |
299 | ||
300 | From F<d_asctime_r.U>: | |
301 | ||
302 | This variable encodes the prototype of asctime_r. | |
303 | It is zero if d_asctime_r is undef, and one of the | |
304 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_asctime_r | |
305 | is defined. | |
306 | ||
307 | =item C<awk> | |
308 | ||
309 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
310 | ||
311 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
312 | full pathname (if any) of the awk program. After Configure runs, | |
313 | the value is reset to a plain C<awk> and is not useful. | |
314 | ||
315 | =back | |
316 | ||
317 | =head2 b | |
318 | ||
319 | =over 4 | |
320 | ||
321 | =item C<baserev> | |
322 | ||
323 | From F<baserev.U>: | |
324 | ||
325 | The base revision level of this package, from the F<.package> file. | |
326 | ||
327 | =item C<bash> | |
328 | ||
329 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
330 | ||
331 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
332 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
333 | ||
334 | =item C<bin> | |
335 | ||
336 | From F<bin.U>: | |
337 | ||
338 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants | |
339 | to put publicly executable images for the package in question. It | |
340 | is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/bin>. Programs using | |
341 | this variable must be prepared to deal with F<~name> substitution. | |
342 | ||
343 | =item C<binexp> | |
344 | ||
345 | From F<bin.U>: | |
346 | ||
347 | This is the same as the bin variable, but is filename expanded at | |
348 | configuration time, for use in your makefiles. | |
349 | ||
350 | =item C<bison> | |
351 | ||
352 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
353 | ||
354 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
355 | full pathname (if any) of the bison program. After Configure runs, | |
356 | the value is reset to a plain C<bison> and is not useful. | |
357 | ||
358 | =item C<byacc> | |
359 | ||
360 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
361 | ||
362 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
363 | full pathname (if any) of the byacc program. After Configure runs, | |
364 | the value is reset to a plain C<byacc> and is not useful. | |
365 | ||
366 | =item C<byteorder> | |
367 | ||
368 | From F<byteorder.U>: | |
369 | ||
370 | This variable holds the byte order in a C<UV>. In the following, | |
371 | larger digits indicate more significance. The variable byteorder | |
372 | is either 4321 on a big-endian machine, or 1234 on a little-endian, | |
373 | or 87654321 on a Cray ... or 3412 with weird order ! | |
374 | ||
375 | =back | |
376 | ||
377 | =head2 c | |
378 | ||
379 | =over 4 | |
380 | ||
381 | =item C<c> | |
382 | ||
383 | From F<n.U>: | |
384 | ||
385 | This variable contains the \c string if that is what causes the echo | |
386 | command to suppress newline. Otherwise it is null. Correct usage is | |
387 | $echo $n "prompt for a question: $c". | |
388 | ||
389 | =item C<castflags> | |
390 | ||
391 | From F<d_castneg.U>: | |
392 | ||
393 | This variable contains a flag that precise difficulties the | |
394 | compiler has casting odd floating values to unsigned long: | |
395 | 0 = ok | |
396 | 1 = couldn't cast < 0 | |
397 | 2 = couldn't cast >= 0x80000000 | |
398 | 4 = couldn't cast in argument expression list | |
399 | ||
400 | =item C<cat> | |
401 | ||
402 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
403 | ||
404 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
405 | full pathname (if any) of the cat program. After Configure runs, | |
406 | the value is reset to a plain C<cat> and is not useful. | |
407 | ||
408 | =item C<cc> | |
409 | ||
410 | From F<cc.U>: | |
411 | ||
412 | This variable holds the name of a command to execute a C compiler which | |
413 | can resolve multiple global references that happen to have the same | |
414 | name. Usual values are C<cc> and C<gcc>. | |
415 | Fervent C<ANSI> compilers may be called C<c89>. C<AIX> has xlc. | |
416 | ||
417 | =item C<cccdlflags> | |
418 | ||
419 | From F<dlsrc.U>: | |
420 | ||
421 | This variable contains any special flags that might need to be | |
422 | passed with C<cc -c> to compile modules to be used to create a shared | |
423 | library that will be used for dynamic loading. For hpux, this | |
424 | should be +z. It is up to the makefile to use it. | |
425 | ||
426 | =item C<ccdlflags> | |
427 | ||
428 | From F<dlsrc.U>: | |
429 | ||
430 | This variable contains any special flags that might need to be | |
431 | passed to cc to link with a shared library for dynamic loading. | |
432 | It is up to the makefile to use it. For sunos 4.1, it should | |
433 | be empty. | |
434 | ||
435 | =item C<ccflags> | |
436 | ||
437 | From F<ccflags.U>: | |
438 | ||
439 | This variable contains any additional C compiler flags desired by | |
440 | the user. It is up to the Makefile to use this. | |
441 | ||
442 | =item C<ccflags_uselargefiles> | |
443 | ||
444 | From F<uselfs.U>: | |
445 | ||
446 | This variable contains the compiler flags needed by large file builds | |
447 | and added to ccflags by hints files. | |
448 | ||
449 | =item C<ccname> | |
450 | ||
451 | From F<Checkcc.U>: | |
452 | ||
453 | This can set either by hints files or by Configure. If using | |
454 | gcc, this is gcc, and if not, usually equal to cc, unimpressive, no? | |
455 | Some platforms, however, make good use of this by storing the | |
456 | flavor of the C compiler being used here. For example if using | |
457 | the Sun WorkShop suite, ccname will be C<workshop>. | |
458 | ||
459 | =item C<ccsymbols> | |
460 | ||
461 | From F<Cppsym.U>: | |
462 | ||
463 | The variable contains the symbols defined by the C compiler alone. | |
464 | The symbols defined by cpp or by cc when it calls cpp are not in | |
465 | this list, see cppsymbols and cppccsymbols. | |
466 | The list is a space-separated list of symbol=value tokens. | |
467 | ||
468 | =item C<ccversion> | |
469 | ||
470 | From F<Checkcc.U>: | |
471 | ||
472 | This can set either by hints files or by Configure. If using | |
473 | a (non-gcc) vendor cc, this variable may contain a version for | |
474 | the compiler. | |
475 | ||
476 | =item C<cf_by> | |
477 | ||
478 | From F<cf_who.U>: | |
479 | ||
480 | Login name of the person who ran the Configure script and answered the | |
481 | questions. This is used to tag both F<config.sh> and F<config_h.SH>. | |
482 | ||
483 | =item C<cf_email> | |
484 | ||
485 | From F<cf_email.U>: | |
486 | ||
487 | Electronic mail address of the person who ran Configure. This can be | |
488 | used by units that require the user's e-mail, like F<MailList.U>. | |
489 | ||
490 | =item C<cf_time> | |
491 | ||
492 | From F<cf_who.U>: | |
493 | ||
494 | Holds the output of the C<date> command when the configuration file was | |
495 | produced. This is used to tag both F<config.sh> and F<config_h.SH>. | |
496 | ||
497 | =item C<charsize> | |
498 | ||
499 | From F<charsize.U>: | |
500 | ||
501 | This variable contains the value of the C<CHARSIZE> symbol, which | |
502 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a character. | |
503 | ||
504 | =item C<chgrp> | |
505 | ||
506 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
507 | ||
508 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
509 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
510 | ||
511 | =item C<chmod> | |
512 | ||
513 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
514 | ||
515 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
516 | full pathname (if any) of the chmod program. After Configure runs, | |
517 | the value is reset to a plain C<chmod> and is not useful. | |
518 | ||
519 | =item C<chown> | |
520 | ||
521 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
522 | ||
523 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
524 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
525 | ||
526 | =item C<clocktype> | |
527 | ||
528 | From F<d_times.U>: | |
529 | ||
530 | This variable holds the type returned by times(). It can be long, | |
531 | or clock_t on C<BSD> sites (in which case <sys/types.h> should be | |
532 | included). | |
533 | ||
534 | =item C<comm> | |
535 | ||
536 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
537 | ||
538 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
539 | full pathname (if any) of the comm program. After Configure runs, | |
540 | the value is reset to a plain C<comm> and is not useful. | |
541 | ||
542 | =item C<compress> | |
543 | ||
544 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
545 | ||
546 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
547 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
548 | ||
549 | =item C<contains> | |
550 | ||
551 | From F<contains.U>: | |
552 | ||
553 | This variable holds the command to do a grep with a proper return | |
554 | status. On most sane systems it is simply C<grep>. On insane systems | |
555 | it is a grep followed by a cat followed by a test. This variable | |
556 | is primarily for the use of other Configure units. | |
557 | ||
558 | =item C<cp> | |
559 | ||
560 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
561 | ||
562 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
563 | full pathname (if any) of the cp program. After Configure runs, | |
564 | the value is reset to a plain C<cp> and is not useful. | |
565 | ||
566 | =item C<cpio> | |
567 | ||
568 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
569 | ||
570 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
571 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
572 | ||
573 | =item C<cpp> | |
574 | ||
575 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
576 | ||
577 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
578 | full pathname (if any) of the cpp program. After Configure runs, | |
579 | the value is reset to a plain C<cpp> and is not useful. | |
580 | ||
581 | =item C<cpp_stuff> | |
582 | ||
583 | From F<cpp_stuff.U>: | |
584 | ||
585 | This variable contains an identification of the concatenation mechanism | |
586 | used by the C preprocessor. | |
587 | ||
588 | =item C<cppccsymbols> | |
589 | ||
590 | From F<Cppsym.U>: | |
591 | ||
592 | The variable contains the symbols defined by the C compiler | |
593 | when it calls cpp. The symbols defined by the cc alone or cpp | |
594 | alone are not in this list, see ccsymbols and cppsymbols. | |
595 | The list is a space-separated list of symbol=value tokens. | |
596 | ||
597 | =item C<cppflags> | |
598 | ||
599 | From F<ccflags.U>: | |
600 | ||
601 | This variable holds the flags that will be passed to the C pre- | |
602 | processor. It is up to the Makefile to use it. | |
603 | ||
604 | =item C<cpplast> | |
605 | ||
606 | From F<cppstdin.U>: | |
607 | ||
608 | This variable has the same functionality as cppminus, only it applies | |
609 | to cpprun and not cppstdin. | |
610 | ||
611 | =item C<cppminus> | |
612 | ||
613 | From F<cppstdin.U>: | |
614 | ||
615 | This variable contains the second part of the string which will invoke | |
616 | the C preprocessor on the standard input and produce to standard | |
617 | output. This variable will have the value C<-> if cppstdin needs | |
618 | a minus to specify standard input, otherwise the value is "". | |
619 | ||
620 | =item C<cpprun> | |
621 | ||
622 | From F<cppstdin.U>: | |
623 | ||
624 | This variable contains the command which will invoke a C preprocessor | |
625 | on standard input and put the output to stdout. It is guaranteed not | |
626 | to be a wrapper and may be a null string if no preprocessor can be | |
627 | made directly available. This preprocessor might be different from the | |
628 | one used by the C compiler. Don't forget to append cpplast after the | |
629 | preprocessor options. | |
630 | ||
631 | =item C<cppstdin> | |
632 | ||
633 | From F<cppstdin.U>: | |
634 | ||
635 | This variable contains the command which will invoke the C | |
636 | preprocessor on standard input and put the output to stdout. | |
637 | It is primarily used by other Configure units that ask about | |
638 | preprocessor symbols. | |
639 | ||
640 | =item C<cppsymbols> | |
641 | ||
642 | From F<Cppsym.U>: | |
643 | ||
644 | The variable contains the symbols defined by the C preprocessor | |
645 | alone. The symbols defined by cc or by cc when it calls cpp are | |
646 | not in this list, see ccsymbols and cppccsymbols. | |
647 | The list is a space-separated list of symbol=value tokens. | |
648 | ||
649 | =item C<crypt_r_proto> | |
650 | ||
651 | From F<d_crypt_r.U>: | |
652 | ||
653 | This variable encodes the prototype of crypt_r. | |
654 | It is zero if d_crypt_r is undef, and one of the | |
655 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_crypt_r | |
656 | is defined. | |
657 | ||
658 | =item C<cryptlib> | |
659 | ||
660 | From F<d_crypt.U>: | |
661 | ||
662 | This variable holds -lcrypt or the path to a F<libcrypt.a> archive if | |
663 | the crypt() function is not defined in the standard C library. It is | |
664 | up to the Makefile to use this. | |
665 | ||
666 | =item C<csh> | |
667 | ||
668 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
669 | ||
670 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
671 | full pathname (if any) of the csh program. After Configure runs, | |
672 | the value is reset to a plain C<csh> and is not useful. | |
673 | ||
674 | =item C<ctermid_r_proto> | |
675 | ||
676 | From F<d_ctermid_r.U>: | |
677 | ||
678 | This variable encodes the prototype of ctermid_r. | |
679 | It is zero if d_ctermid_r is undef, and one of the | |
680 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_ctermid_r | |
681 | is defined. | |
682 | ||
683 | =item C<ctime_r_proto> | |
684 | ||
685 | From F<d_ctime_r.U>: | |
686 | ||
687 | This variable encodes the prototype of ctime_r. | |
688 | It is zero if d_ctime_r is undef, and one of the | |
689 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_ctime_r | |
690 | is defined. | |
691 | ||
692 | =back | |
693 | ||
694 | =head2 d | |
695 | ||
696 | =over 4 | |
697 | ||
698 | =item C<d__fwalk> | |
699 | ||
700 | From F<d__fwalk.U>: | |
701 | ||
702 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS__FWALK> if _fwalk() is | |
703 | available to apply a function to all the file handles. | |
704 | ||
705 | =item C<d_access> | |
706 | ||
707 | From F<d_access.U>: | |
708 | ||
709 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ACCESS> if the access() system | |
710 | call is available to check for access permissions using real IDs. | |
711 | ||
712 | =item C<d_accessx> | |
713 | ||
714 | From F<d_accessx.U>: | |
715 | ||
716 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ACCESSX> symbol, which | |
717 | indicates to the C program that the accessx() routine is available. | |
718 | ||
719 | =item C<d_aintl> | |
720 | ||
721 | From F<d_aintl.U>: | |
722 | ||
723 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_AINTL> symbol, which | |
724 | indicates to the C program that the aintl() routine is available. | |
725 | If copysignl is also present we can emulate modfl. | |
726 | ||
727 | =item C<d_alarm> | |
728 | ||
729 | From F<d_alarm.U>: | |
730 | ||
731 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ALARM> symbol, which | |
732 | indicates to the C program that the alarm() routine is available. | |
733 | ||
734 | =item C<d_archlib> | |
735 | ||
736 | From F<archlib.U>: | |
737 | ||
738 | This variable conditionally defines C<ARCHLIB> to hold the pathname | |
739 | of architecture-dependent library files for $package. If | |
740 | $archlib is the same as $privlib, then this is set to undef. | |
741 | ||
742 | =item C<d_asctime_r> | |
743 | ||
744 | From F<d_asctime_r.U>: | |
745 | ||
746 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ASCTIME_R> symbol, | |
747 | which indicates to the C program that the asctime_r() | |
748 | routine is available. | |
749 | ||
750 | =item C<d_atolf> | |
751 | ||
752 | From F<atolf.U>: | |
753 | ||
754 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ATOLF> symbol, which | |
755 | indicates to the C program that the atolf() routine is available. | |
756 | ||
757 | =item C<d_atoll> | |
758 | ||
759 | From F<atoll.U>: | |
760 | ||
761 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ATOLL> symbol, which | |
762 | indicates to the C program that the atoll() routine is available. | |
763 | ||
764 | =item C<d_attribute_format> | |
765 | ||
766 | From F<d_attribut_format.U>: | |
767 | ||
768 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_FORMAT>, which | |
769 | indicates the C compiler can check for printf-like formats. | |
770 | ||
771 | =item C<d_attribute_malloc> | |
772 | ||
773 | From F<d_attribute_malloc.U>: | |
774 | ||
775 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_MALLOC>, which | |
776 | indicates the C compiler can understand functions as having | |
777 | malloc-like semantics. | |
778 | ||
779 | =item C<d_attribute_nonnull> | |
780 | ||
781 | From F<d_attribute_nonnull.U>: | |
782 | ||
783 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_NONNULL>, which | |
784 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain arguments | |
785 | must not be C<NULL>, and will check accordingly at compile time. | |
786 | ||
787 | =item C<d_attribute_noreturn> | |
788 | ||
789 | From F<d_attribute_noreturn.U>: | |
790 | ||
791 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_NORETURN>, which | |
792 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain functions | |
793 | are guaranteed never to return. | |
794 | ||
795 | =item C<d_attribute_pure> | |
796 | ||
797 | From F<d_attribute_pure.U>: | |
798 | ||
799 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_PURE>, which | |
800 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain functions | |
801 | are C<pure> functions, meaning that they have no side effects, and | |
802 | only rely on function input F<and/or> global data for their results. | |
803 | ||
804 | =item C<d_attribute_unused> | |
805 | ||
806 | From F<d_attribute_unused.U>: | |
807 | ||
808 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_UNUSED>, which | |
809 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain variables | |
810 | and arguments may not always be used, and to not throw warnings | |
811 | if they don't get used. | |
812 | ||
813 | =item C<d_attribute_warn_unused_result> | |
814 | ||
815 | From F<d_attribute_warn_unused_result.U>: | |
816 | ||
817 | This variable conditionally defines | |
818 | C<HASATTRIBUTE_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT>, which indicates that the C | |
819 | compiler can know that certain functions have a return values | |
820 | that must not be ignored, such as malloc() or open(). | |
821 | ||
822 | =item C<d_bcmp> | |
823 | ||
824 | From F<d_bcmp.U>: | |
825 | ||
826 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_BCMP> symbol if | |
827 | the bcmp() routine is available to compare strings. | |
828 | ||
829 | =item C<d_bcopy> | |
830 | ||
831 | From F<d_bcopy.U>: | |
832 | ||
833 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_BCOPY> symbol if | |
834 | the bcopy() routine is available to copy strings. | |
835 | ||
836 | =item C<d_bsd> | |
837 | ||
838 | From F<Guess.U>: | |
839 | ||
840 | This symbol conditionally defines the symbol C<BSD> when running on a | |
841 | C<BSD> system. | |
842 | ||
843 | =item C<d_bsdgetpgrp> | |
844 | ||
845 | From F<d_getpgrp.U>: | |
846 | ||
847 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_BSD_GETPGRP> if | |
848 | getpgrp needs one arguments whereas C<USG> one needs none. | |
849 | ||
850 | =item C<d_bsdsetpgrp> | |
851 | ||
852 | From F<d_setpgrp.U>: | |
853 | ||
854 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_BSD_SETPGRP> if | |
855 | setpgrp needs two arguments whereas C<USG> one needs none. | |
856 | See also d_setpgid for a C<POSIX> interface. | |
857 | ||
858 | =item C<d_bzero> | |
859 | ||
860 | From F<d_bzero.U>: | |
861 | ||
862 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_BZERO> symbol if | |
863 | the bzero() routine is available to set memory to 0. | |
864 | ||
865 | =item C<d_casti32> | |
866 | ||
867 | From F<d_casti32.U>: | |
868 | ||
869 | This variable conditionally defines CASTI32, which indicates | |
870 | whether the C compiler can cast large floats to 32-bit ints. | |
871 | ||
872 | =item C<d_castneg> | |
873 | ||
874 | From F<d_castneg.U>: | |
875 | ||
876 | This variable conditionally defines C<CASTNEG>, which indicates | |
877 | wether the C compiler can cast negative float to unsigned. | |
878 | ||
879 | =item C<d_charvspr> | |
880 | ||
881 | From F<d_vprintf.U>: | |
882 | ||
883 | This variable conditionally defines C<CHARVSPRINTF> if this system | |
884 | has vsprintf returning type (char*). The trend seems to be to | |
885 | declare it as "int vsprintf()". | |
886 | ||
887 | =item C<d_chown> | |
888 | ||
889 | From F<d_chown.U>: | |
890 | ||
891 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CHOWN> symbol, which | |
892 | indicates to the C program that the chown() routine is available. | |
893 | ||
894 | =item C<d_chroot> | |
895 | ||
896 | From F<d_chroot.U>: | |
897 | ||
898 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CHROOT> symbol, which | |
899 | indicates to the C program that the chroot() routine is available. | |
900 | ||
901 | =item C<d_chsize> | |
902 | ||
903 | From F<d_chsize.U>: | |
904 | ||
905 | This variable conditionally defines the C<CHSIZE> symbol, which | |
906 | indicates to the C program that the chsize() routine is available | |
907 | to truncate files. You might need a -lx to get this routine. | |
908 | ||
909 | =item C<d_class> | |
910 | ||
911 | From F<d_class.U>: | |
912 | ||
913 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CLASS> symbol, which | |
914 | indicates to the C program that the class() routine is available. | |
915 | ||
916 | =item C<d_clearenv> | |
917 | ||
918 | From F<d_clearenv.U>: | |
919 | ||
920 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CLEARENV> symbol, which | |
921 | indicates to the C program that the clearenv () routine is available. | |
922 | ||
923 | =item C<d_closedir> | |
924 | ||
925 | From F<d_closedir.U>: | |
926 | ||
927 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_CLOSEDIR> if closedir() is | |
928 | available. | |
929 | ||
930 | =item C<d_cmsghdr_s> | |
931 | ||
932 | From F<d_cmsghdr_s.U>: | |
933 | ||
934 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_CMSGHDR> symbol, | |
935 | which indicates that the struct cmsghdr is supported. | |
936 | ||
937 | =item C<d_const> | |
938 | ||
939 | From F<d_const.U>: | |
940 | ||
941 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HASCONST> symbol, which | |
942 | indicates to the C program that this C compiler knows about the | |
943 | const type. | |
944 | ||
945 | =item C<d_copysignl> | |
946 | ||
947 | From F<d_copysignl.U>: | |
948 | ||
949 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_COPYSIGNL> symbol, which | |
950 | indicates to the C program that the copysignl() routine is available. | |
951 | If aintl is also present we can emulate modfl. | |
952 | ||
953 | =item C<d_crypt> | |
954 | ||
955 | From F<d_crypt.U>: | |
956 | ||
957 | This variable conditionally defines the C<CRYPT> symbol, which | |
958 | indicates to the C program that the crypt() routine is available | |
959 | to encrypt passwords and the like. | |
960 | ||
961 | =item C<d_crypt_r> | |
962 | ||
963 | From F<d_crypt_r.U>: | |
964 | ||
965 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CRYPT_R> symbol, | |
966 | which indicates to the C program that the crypt_r() | |
967 | routine is available. | |
968 | ||
969 | =item C<d_csh> | |
970 | ||
971 | From F<d_csh.U>: | |
972 | ||
973 | This variable conditionally defines the C<CSH> symbol, which | |
974 | indicates to the C program that the C-shell exists. | |
975 | ||
976 | =item C<d_ctermid_r> | |
977 | ||
978 | From F<d_ctermid_r.U>: | |
979 | ||
980 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CTERMID_R> symbol, | |
981 | which indicates to the C program that the ctermid_r() | |
982 | routine is available. | |
983 | ||
984 | =item C<d_ctime_r> | |
985 | ||
986 | From F<d_ctime_r.U>: | |
987 | ||
988 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CTIME_R> symbol, | |
989 | which indicates to the C program that the ctime_r() | |
990 | routine is available. | |
991 | ||
992 | =item C<d_cuserid> | |
993 | ||
994 | From F<d_cuserid.U>: | |
995 | ||
996 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CUSERID> symbol, which | |
997 | indicates to the C program that the cuserid() routine is available | |
998 | to get character login names. | |
999 | ||
1000 | =item C<d_dbl_dig> | |
1001 | ||
1002 | From F<d_dbl_dig.U>: | |
1003 | ||
1004 | This variable conditionally defines d_dbl_dig if this system's | |
1005 | header files provide C<DBL_DIG>, which is the number of significant | |
1006 | digits in a double precision number. | |
1007 | ||
1008 | =item C<d_dbminitproto> | |
1009 | ||
1010 | From F<d_dbminitproto.U>: | |
1011 | ||
1012 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DBMINIT_PROTO> symbol, | |
1013 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides | |
1014 | a prototype for the dbminit() function. Otherwise, it is | |
1015 | up to the program to supply one. | |
1016 | ||
1017 | =item C<d_difftime> | |
1018 | ||
1019 | From F<d_difftime.U>: | |
1020 | ||
1021 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DIFFTIME> symbol, which | |
1022 | indicates to the C program that the difftime() routine is available. | |
1023 | ||
1024 | =item C<d_dirfd> | |
1025 | ||
1026 | From F<d_dirfd.U>: | |
1027 | ||
1028 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DIRFD> constant, | |
1029 | which indicates to the C program that dirfd() is available | |
1030 | to return the file descriptor of a directory stream. | |
1031 | ||
1032 | =item C<d_dirnamlen> | |
1033 | ||
1034 | From F<i_dirent.U>: | |
1035 | ||
1036 | This variable conditionally defines C<DIRNAMLEN>, which indicates | |
1037 | to the C program that the length of directory entry names is | |
1038 | provided by a d_namelen field. | |
1039 | ||
1040 | =item C<d_dlerror> | |
1041 | ||
1042 | From F<d_dlerror.U>: | |
1043 | ||
1044 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DLERROR> symbol, which | |
1045 | indicates to the C program that the dlerror() routine is available. | |
1046 | ||
1047 | =item C<d_dlopen> | |
1048 | ||
1049 | From F<d_dlopen.U>: | |
1050 | ||
1051 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DLOPEN> symbol, which | |
1052 | indicates to the C program that the dlopen() routine is available. | |
1053 | ||
1054 | =item C<d_dlsymun> | |
1055 | ||
1056 | From F<d_dlsymun.U>: | |
1057 | ||
1058 | This variable conditionally defines C<DLSYM_NEEDS_UNDERSCORE>, which | |
1059 | indicates that we need to prepend an underscore to the symbol | |
1060 | name before calling dlsym(). | |
1061 | ||
1062 | =item C<d_dosuid> | |
1063 | ||
1064 | From F<d_dosuid.U>: | |
1065 | ||
1066 | This variable conditionally defines the symbol C<DOSUID>, which | |
1067 | tells the C program that it should insert setuid emulation code | |
1068 | on hosts which have setuid #! scripts disabled. | |
1069 | ||
1070 | =item C<d_drand48_r> | |
1071 | ||
1072 | From F<d_drand48_r.U>: | |
1073 | ||
1074 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_DRAND48_R symbol, | |
1075 | which indicates to the C program that the drand48_r() | |
1076 | routine is available. | |
1077 | ||
1078 | =item C<d_drand48proto> | |
1079 | ||
1080 | From F<d_drand48proto.U>: | |
1081 | ||
1082 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_DRAND48_PROTO symbol, | |
1083 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides | |
1084 | a prototype for the drand48() function. Otherwise, it is | |
1085 | up to the program to supply one. | |
1086 | ||
1087 | =item C<d_dup2> | |
1088 | ||
1089 | From F<d_dup2.U>: | |
1090 | ||
1091 | This variable conditionally defines HAS_DUP2 if dup2() is | |
1092 | available to duplicate file descriptors. | |
1093 | ||
1094 | =item C<d_eaccess> | |
1095 | ||
1096 | From F<d_eaccess.U>: | |
1097 | ||
1098 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_EACCESS> symbol, which | |
1099 | indicates to the C program that the eaccess() routine is available. | |
1100 | ||
1101 | =item C<d_endgrent> | |
1102 | ||
1103 | From F<d_endgrent.U>: | |
1104 | ||
1105 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDGRENT> symbol, which | |
1106 | indicates to the C program that the endgrent() routine is available | |
1107 | for sequential access of the group database. | |
1108 | ||
1109 | =item C<d_endgrent_r> | |
1110 | ||
1111 | From F<d_endgrent_r.U>: | |
1112 | ||
1113 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDGRENT_R> symbol, | |
1114 | which indicates to the C program that the endgrent_r() | |
1115 | routine is available. | |
1116 | ||
1117 | =item C<d_endhent> | |
1118 | ||
1119 | From F<d_endhent.U>: | |
1120 | ||
1121 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDHOSTENT> if endhostent() is | |
1122 | available to close whatever was being used for host queries. | |
1123 | ||
1124 | =item C<d_endhostent_r> | |
1125 | ||
1126 | From F<d_endhostent_r.U>: | |
1127 | ||
1128 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDHOSTENT_R> symbol, | |
1129 | which indicates to the C program that the endhostent_r() | |
1130 | routine is available. | |
1131 | ||
1132 | =item C<d_endnent> | |
1133 | ||
1134 | From F<d_endnent.U>: | |
1135 | ||
1136 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDNETENT> if endnetent() is | |
1137 | available to close whatever was being used for network queries. | |
1138 | ||
1139 | =item C<d_endnetent_r> | |
1140 | ||
1141 | From F<d_endnetent_r.U>: | |
1142 | ||
1143 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDNETENT_R> symbol, | |
1144 | which indicates to the C program that the endnetent_r() | |
1145 | routine is available. | |
1146 | ||
1147 | =item C<d_endpent> | |
1148 | ||
1149 | From F<d_endpent.U>: | |
1150 | ||
1151 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDPROTOENT> if endprotoent() is | |
1152 | available to close whatever was being used for protocol queries. | |
1153 | ||
1154 | =item C<d_endprotoent_r> | |
1155 | ||
1156 | From F<d_endprotoent_r.U>: | |
1157 | ||
1158 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDPROTOENT_R> symbol, | |
1159 | which indicates to the C program that the endprotoent_r() | |
1160 | routine is available. | |
1161 | ||
1162 | =item C<d_endpwent> | |
1163 | ||
1164 | From F<d_endpwent.U>: | |
1165 | ||
1166 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDPWENT> symbol, which | |
1167 | indicates to the C program that the endpwent() routine is available | |
1168 | for sequential access of the passwd database. | |
1169 | ||
1170 | =item C<d_endpwent_r> | |
1171 | ||
1172 | From F<d_endpwent_r.U>: | |
1173 | ||
1174 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDPWENT_R> symbol, | |
1175 | which indicates to the C program that the endpwent_r() | |
1176 | routine is available. | |
1177 | ||
1178 | =item C<d_endsent> | |
1179 | ||
1180 | From F<d_endsent.U>: | |
1181 | ||
1182 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDSERVENT> if endservent() is | |
1183 | available to close whatever was being used for service queries. | |
1184 | ||
1185 | =item C<d_endservent_r> | |
1186 | ||
1187 | From F<d_endservent_r.U>: | |
1188 | ||
1189 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDSERVENT_R> symbol, | |
1190 | which indicates to the C program that the endservent_r() | |
1191 | routine is available. | |
1192 | ||
1193 | =item C<d_eofnblk> | |
1194 | ||
1195 | From F<nblock_io.U>: | |
1196 | ||
1197 | This variable conditionally defines C<EOF_NONBLOCK> if C<EOF> can be seen | |
1198 | when reading from a non-blocking I/O source. | |
1199 | ||
1200 | =item C<d_eunice> | |
1201 | ||
1202 | From F<Guess.U>: | |
1203 | ||
1204 | This variable conditionally defines the symbols C<EUNICE> and C<VAX>, which | |
1205 | alerts the C program that it must deal with ideosyncracies of C<VMS>. | |
1206 | ||
1207 | =item C<d_faststdio> | |
1208 | ||
1209 | From F<d_faststdio.U>: | |
1210 | ||
1211 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FAST_STDIO> symbol, | |
1212 | which indicates to the C program that the "fast stdio" is available | |
1213 | to manipulate the stdio buffers directly. | |
1214 | ||
1215 | =item C<d_fchdir> | |
1216 | ||
1217 | From F<d_fchdir.U>: | |
1218 | ||
1219 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCHDIR> symbol, which | |
1220 | indicates to the C program that the fchdir() routine is available. | |
1221 | ||
1222 | =item C<d_fchmod> | |
1223 | ||
1224 | From F<d_fchmod.U>: | |
1225 | ||
1226 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCHMOD> symbol, which | |
1227 | indicates to the C program that the fchmod() routine is available | |
1228 | to change mode of opened files. | |
1229 | ||
1230 | =item C<d_fchown> | |
1231 | ||
1232 | From F<d_fchown.U>: | |
1233 | ||
1234 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCHOWN> symbol, which | |
1235 | indicates to the C program that the fchown() routine is available | |
1236 | to change ownership of opened files. | |
1237 | ||
1238 | =item C<d_fcntl> | |
1239 | ||
1240 | From F<d_fcntl.U>: | |
1241 | ||
1242 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCNTL> symbol, and indicates | |
1243 | whether the fcntl() function exists | |
1244 | ||
1245 | =item C<d_fcntl_can_lock> | |
1246 | ||
1247 | From F<d_fcntl_can_lock.U>: | |
1248 | ||
1249 | This variable conditionally defines the C<FCNTL_CAN_LOCK> symbol | |
1250 | and indicates whether file locking with fcntl() works. | |
1251 | ||
1252 | =item C<d_fd_macros> | |
1253 | ||
1254 | From F<d_fd_set.U>: | |
1255 | ||
1256 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<HAS_FD_MACROS> symbol, | |
1257 | which indicates if your C compiler knows about the macros which | |
1258 | manipulate an fd_set. | |
1259 | ||
1260 | =item C<d_fd_set> | |
1261 | ||
1262 | From F<d_fd_set.U>: | |
1263 | ||
1264 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<HAS_FD_SET> symbol, | |
1265 | which indicates if your C compiler knows about the fd_set typedef. | |
1266 | ||
1267 | =item C<d_fds_bits> | |
1268 | ||
1269 | From F<d_fd_set.U>: | |
1270 | ||
1271 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<HAS_FDS_BITS> symbol, | |
1272 | which indicates if your fd_set typedef contains the fds_bits member. | |
1273 | If you have an fd_set typedef, but the dweebs who installed it did | |
1274 | a half-fast job and neglected to provide the macros to manipulate | |
1275 | an fd_set, C<HAS_FDS_BITS> will let us know how to fix the gaffe. | |
1276 | ||
1277 | =item C<d_fgetpos> | |
1278 | ||
1279 | From F<d_fgetpos.U>: | |
1280 | ||
1281 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_FGETPOS> if fgetpos() is | |
1282 | available to get the file position indicator. | |
1283 | ||
1284 | =item C<d_finite> | |
1285 | ||
1286 | From F<d_finite.U>: | |
1287 | ||
1288 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FINITE> symbol, which | |
1289 | indicates to the C program that the finite() routine is available. | |
1290 | ||
1291 | =item C<d_finitel> | |
1292 | ||
1293 | From F<d_finitel.U>: | |
1294 | ||
1295 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FINITEL> symbol, which | |
1296 | indicates to the C program that the finitel() routine is available. | |
1297 | ||
1298 | =item C<d_flexfnam> | |
1299 | ||
1300 | From F<d_flexfnam.U>: | |
1301 | ||
1302 | This variable conditionally defines the C<FLEXFILENAMES> symbol, which | |
1303 | indicates that the system supports filenames longer than 14 characters. | |
1304 | ||
1305 | =item C<d_flock> | |
1306 | ||
1307 | From F<d_flock.U>: | |
1308 | ||
1309 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_FLOCK> if flock() is | |
1310 | available to do file locking. | |
1311 | ||
1312 | =item C<d_flockproto> | |
1313 | ||
1314 | From F<d_flockproto.U>: | |
1315 | ||
1316 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FLOCK_PROTO> symbol, | |
1317 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides | |
1318 | a prototype for the flock() function. Otherwise, it is | |
1319 | up to the program to supply one. | |
1320 | ||
1321 | =item C<d_fork> | |
1322 | ||
1323 | From F<d_fork.U>: | |
1324 | ||
1325 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FORK> symbol, which | |
1326 | indicates to the C program that the fork() routine is available. | |
1327 | ||
1328 | =item C<d_fp_class> | |
1329 | ||
1330 | From F<d_fp_class.U>: | |
1331 | ||
1332 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FP_CLASS> symbol, which | |
1333 | indicates to the C program that the fp_class() routine is available. | |
1334 | ||
1335 | =item C<d_fpathconf> | |
1336 | ||
1337 | From F<d_pathconf.U>: | |
1338 | ||
1339 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPATHCONF> symbol, which | |
1340 | indicates to the C program that the pathconf() routine is available | |
1341 | to determine file-system related limits and options associated | |
1342 | with a given open file descriptor. | |
1343 | ||
1344 | =item C<d_fpclass> | |
1345 | ||
1346 | From F<d_fpclass.U>: | |
1347 | ||
1348 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPCLASS> symbol, which | |
1349 | indicates to the C program that the fpclass() routine is available. | |
1350 | ||
1351 | =item C<d_fpclassify> | |
1352 | ||
1353 | From F<d_fpclassify.U>: | |
1354 | ||
1355 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPCLASSIFY> symbol, which | |
1356 | indicates to the C program that the fpclassify() routine is available. | |
1357 | ||
1358 | =item C<d_fpclassl> | |
1359 | ||
1360 | From F<d_fpclassl.U>: | |
1361 | ||
1362 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPCLASSL> symbol, which | |
1363 | indicates to the C program that the fpclassl() routine is available. | |
1364 | ||
1365 | =item C<d_fpos64_t> | |
1366 | ||
1367 | From F<d_fpos64_t.U>: | |
1368 | ||
1369 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports fpos64_t. | |
1370 | ||
1371 | =item C<d_frexpl> | |
1372 | ||
1373 | From F<d_frexpl.U>: | |
1374 | ||
1375 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FREXPL> symbol, which | |
1376 | indicates to the C program that the frexpl() routine is available. | |
1377 | ||
1378 | =item C<d_fs_data_s> | |
1379 | ||
1380 | From F<d_fs_data_s.U>: | |
1381 | ||
1382 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_FS_DATA> symbol, | |
1383 | which indicates that the struct fs_data is supported. | |
1384 | ||
1385 | =item C<d_fseeko> | |
1386 | ||
1387 | From F<d_fseeko.U>: | |
1388 | ||
1389 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSEEKO> symbol, which | |
1390 | indicates to the C program that the fseeko() routine is available. | |
1391 | ||
1392 | =item C<d_fsetpos> | |
1393 | ||
1394 | From F<d_fsetpos.U>: | |
1395 | ||
1396 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_FSETPOS> if fsetpos() is | |
1397 | available to set the file position indicator. | |
1398 | ||
1399 | =item C<d_fstatfs> | |
1400 | ||
1401 | From F<d_fstatfs.U>: | |
1402 | ||
1403 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSTATFS> symbol, which | |
1404 | indicates to the C program that the fstatfs() routine is available. | |
1405 | ||
1406 | =item C<d_fstatvfs> | |
1407 | ||
1408 | From F<d_statvfs.U>: | |
1409 | ||
1410 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSTATVFS> symbol, which | |
1411 | indicates to the C program that the fstatvfs() routine is available. | |
1412 | ||
1413 | =item C<d_fsync> | |
1414 | ||
1415 | From F<d_fsync.U>: | |
1416 | ||
1417 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSYNC> symbol, which | |
1418 | indicates to the C program that the fsync() routine is available. | |
1419 | ||
1420 | =item C<d_ftello> | |
1421 | ||
1422 | From F<d_ftello.U>: | |
1423 | ||
1424 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FTELLO> symbol, which | |
1425 | indicates to the C program that the ftello() routine is available. | |
1426 | ||
1427 | =item C<d_ftime> | |
1428 | ||
1429 | From F<d_ftime.U>: | |
1430 | ||
1431 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FTIME> symbol, which indicates | |
1432 | that the ftime() routine exists. The ftime() routine is basically | |
1433 | a sub-second accuracy clock. | |
1434 | ||
1435 | =item C<d_futimes> | |
1436 | ||
1437 | From F<f_futimes.U>: | |
1438 | ||
1439 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FUTIMES> symbol, which | |
1440 | indicates to the C program that the futimes() routine is available. | |
1441 | ||
1442 | =item C<d_Gconvert> | |
1443 | ||
1444 | From F<d_gconvert.U>: | |
1445 | ||
1446 | This variable holds what Gconvert is defined as to convert | |
1447 | floating point numbers into strings. By default, Configure | |
1448 | sets C<this> macro to use the first of gconvert, gcvt, or sprintf | |
1449 | that pass sprintf-%g-like behaviour tests. If perl is using | |
1450 | long doubles, the macro uses the first of the following | |
1451 | functions that pass Configure's tests: qgcvt, sprintf (if | |
1452 | Configure knows how to make sprintf format long doubles--see | |
1453 | sPRIgldbl), gconvert, gcvt, and sprintf (casting to double). | |
1454 | The gconvert_preference and gconvert_ld_preference variables | |
1455 | can be used to alter Configure's preferences, for doubles and | |
1456 | long doubles, respectively. If present, they contain a | |
1457 | space-separated list of one or more of the above function | |
1458 | names in the order they should be tried. | |
1459 | ||
1460 | d_Gconvert may be set to override Configure with a platform- | |
1461 | specific function. If this function expects a double, a | |
1462 | different value may need to be set by the F<uselongdouble.cbu> | |
1463 | call-back unit so that long doubles can be formatted without | |
1464 | loss of precision. | |
1465 | ||
1466 | =item C<d_getcwd> | |
1467 | ||
1468 | From F<d_getcwd.U>: | |
1469 | ||
1470 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETCWD> symbol, which | |
1471 | indicates to the C program that the getcwd() routine is available | |
1472 | to get the current working directory. | |
1473 | ||
1474 | =item C<d_getespwnam> | |
1475 | ||
1476 | From F<d_getespwnam.U>: | |
1477 | ||
1478 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETESPWNAM> if getespwnam() is | |
1479 | available to retrieve enchanced (shadow) password entries by name. | |
1480 | ||
1481 | =item C<d_getfsstat> | |
1482 | ||
1483 | From F<d_getfsstat.U>: | |
1484 | ||
1485 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETFSSTAT> symbol, which | |
1486 | indicates to the C program that the getfsstat() routine is available. | |
1487 | ||
1488 | =item C<d_getgrent> | |
1489 | ||
1490 | From F<d_getgrent.U>: | |
1491 | ||
1492 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRENT> symbol, which | |
1493 | indicates to the C program that the getgrent() routine is available | |
1494 | for sequential access of the group database. | |
1495 | ||
1496 | =item C<d_getgrent_r> | |
1497 | ||
1498 | From F<d_getgrent_r.U>: | |
1499 | ||
1500 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRENT_R> symbol, | |
1501 | which indicates to the C program that the getgrent_r() | |
1502 | routine is available. | |
1503 | ||
1504 | =item C<d_getgrgid_r> | |
1505 | ||
1506 | From F<d_getgrgid_r.U>: | |
1507 | ||
1508 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRGID_R> symbol, | |
1509 | which indicates to the C program that the getgrgid_r() | |
1510 | routine is available. | |
1511 | ||
1512 | =item C<d_getgrnam_r> | |
1513 | ||
1514 | From F<d_getgrnam_r.U>: | |
1515 | ||
1516 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRNAM_R> symbol, | |
1517 | which indicates to the C program that the getgrnam_r() | |
1518 | routine is available. | |
1519 | ||
1520 | =item C<d_getgrps> | |
1521 | ||
1522 | From F<d_getgrps.U>: | |
1523 | ||
1524 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGROUPS> symbol, which | |
1525 | indicates to the C program that the getgroups() routine is available | |
1526 | to get the list of process groups. | |
1527 | ||
1528 | =item C<d_gethbyaddr> | |
1529 | ||
1530 | From F<d_gethbyad.U>: | |
1531 | ||
1532 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYADDR> symbol, which | |
1533 | indicates to the C program that the gethostbyaddr() routine is available | |
1534 | to look up hosts by their C<IP> addresses. | |
1535 | ||
1536 | =item C<d_gethbyname> | |
1537 | ||
1538 | From F<d_gethbynm.U>: | |
1539 | ||
1540 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYNAME> symbol, which | |
1541 | indicates to the C program that the gethostbyname() routine is available | |
1542 | to look up host names in some data base or other. | |
1543 | ||
1544 | =item C<d_gethent> | |
1545 | ||
1546 | From F<d_gethent.U>: | |
1547 | ||
1548 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETHOSTENT> if gethostent() is | |
1549 | available to look up host names in some data base or another. | |
1550 | ||
1551 | =item C<d_gethname> | |
1552 | ||
1553 | From F<d_gethname.U>: | |
1554 | ||
1555 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTNAME> symbol, which | |
1556 | indicates to the C program that the gethostname() routine may be | |
1557 | used to derive the host name. | |
1558 | ||
1559 | =item C<d_gethostbyaddr_r> | |
1560 | ||
1561 | From F<d_gethostbyaddr_r.U>: | |
1562 | ||
1563 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYADDR_R> symbol, | |
1564 | which indicates to the C program that the gethostbyaddr_r() | |
1565 | routine is available. | |
1566 | ||
1567 | =item C<d_gethostbyname_r> | |
1568 | ||
1569 | From F<d_gethostbyname_r.U>: | |
1570 | ||
1571 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYNAME_R> symbol, | |
1572 | which indicates to the C program that the gethostbyname_r() | |
1573 | routine is available. | |
1574 | ||
1575 | =item C<d_gethostent_r> | |
1576 | ||
1577 | From F<d_gethostent_r.U>: | |
1578 | ||
1579 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTENT_R> symbol, | |
1580 | which indicates to the C program that the gethostent_r() | |
1581 | routine is available. | |
1582 | ||
1583 | =item C<d_gethostprotos> | |
1584 | ||
1585 | From F<d_gethostprotos.U>: | |
1586 | ||
1587 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOST_PROTOS> symbol, | |
1588 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies | |
1589 | prototypes for the various gethost*() functions. | |
1590 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types. | |
1591 | ||
1592 | =item C<d_getitimer> | |
1593 | ||
1594 | From F<d_getitimer.U>: | |
1595 | ||
1596 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETITIMER> symbol, which | |
1597 | indicates to the C program that the getitimer() routine is available. | |
1598 | ||
1599 | =item C<d_getlogin> | |
1600 | ||
1601 | From F<d_getlogin.U>: | |
1602 | ||
1603 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETLOGIN> symbol, which | |
1604 | indicates to the C program that the getlogin() routine is available | |
1605 | to get the login name. | |
1606 | ||
1607 | =item C<d_getlogin_r> | |
1608 | ||
1609 | From F<d_getlogin_r.U>: | |
1610 | ||
1611 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETLOGIN_R> symbol, | |
1612 | which indicates to the C program that the getlogin_r() | |
1613 | routine is available. | |
1614 | ||
1615 | =item C<d_getmnt> | |
1616 | ||
1617 | From F<d_getmnt.U>: | |
1618 | ||
1619 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETMNT> symbol, which | |
1620 | indicates to the C program that the getmnt() routine is available | |
1621 | to retrieve one or more mount info blocks by filename. | |
1622 | ||
1623 | =item C<d_getmntent> | |
1624 | ||
1625 | From F<d_getmntent.U>: | |
1626 | ||
1627 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETMNTENT> symbol, which | |
1628 | indicates to the C program that the getmntent() routine is available | |
1629 | to iterate through mounted files to get their mount info. | |
1630 | ||
1631 | =item C<d_getnbyaddr> | |
1632 | ||
1633 | From F<d_getnbyad.U>: | |
1634 | ||
1635 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYADDR> symbol, which | |
1636 | indicates to the C program that the getnetbyaddr() routine is available | |
1637 | to look up networks by their C<IP> addresses. | |
1638 | ||
1639 | =item C<d_getnbyname> | |
1640 | ||
1641 | From F<d_getnbynm.U>: | |
1642 | ||
1643 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYNAME> symbol, which | |
1644 | indicates to the C program that the getnetbyname() routine is available | |
1645 | to look up networks by their names. | |
1646 | ||
1647 | =item C<d_getnent> | |
1648 | ||
1649 | From F<d_getnent.U>: | |
1650 | ||
1651 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETNETENT> if getnetent() is | |
1652 | available to look up network names in some data base or another. | |
1653 | ||
1654 | =item C<d_getnetbyaddr_r> | |
1655 | ||
1656 | From F<d_getnetbyaddr_r.U>: | |
1657 | ||
1658 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYADDR_R> symbol, | |
1659 | which indicates to the C program that the getnetbyaddr_r() | |
1660 | routine is available. | |
1661 | ||
1662 | =item C<d_getnetbyname_r> | |
1663 | ||
1664 | From F<d_getnetbyname_r.U>: | |
1665 | ||
1666 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYNAME_R> symbol, | |
1667 | which indicates to the C program that the getnetbyname_r() | |
1668 | routine is available. | |
1669 | ||
1670 | =item C<d_getnetent_r> | |
1671 | ||
1672 | From F<d_getnetent_r.U>: | |
1673 | ||
1674 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETENT_R> symbol, | |
1675 | which indicates to the C program that the getnetent_r() | |
1676 | routine is available. | |
1677 | ||
1678 | =item C<d_getnetprotos> | |
1679 | ||
1680 | From F<d_getnetprotos.U>: | |
1681 | ||
1682 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNET_PROTOS> symbol, | |
1683 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies | |
1684 | prototypes for the various getnet*() functions. | |
1685 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types. | |
1686 | ||
1687 | =item C<d_getpagsz> | |
1688 | ||
1689 | From F<d_getpagsz.U>: | |
1690 | ||
1691 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPAGESIZE> if getpagesize() | |
1692 | is available to get the system page size. | |
1693 | ||
1694 | =item C<d_getpbyname> | |
1695 | ||
1696 | From F<d_getprotby.U>: | |
1697 | ||
1698 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNAME> | |
1699 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the | |
1700 | getprotobyname() routine is available to look up protocols | |
1701 | by their name. | |
1702 | ||
1703 | =item C<d_getpbynumber> | |
1704 | ||
1705 | From F<d_getprotby.U>: | |
1706 | ||
1707 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNUMBER> | |
1708 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the | |
1709 | getprotobynumber() routine is available to look up protocols | |
1710 | by their number. | |
1711 | ||
1712 | =item C<d_getpent> | |
1713 | ||
1714 | From F<d_getpent.U>: | |
1715 | ||
1716 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPROTOENT> if getprotoent() is | |
1717 | available to look up protocols in some data base or another. | |
1718 | ||
1719 | =item C<d_getpgid> | |
1720 | ||
1721 | From F<d_getpgid.U>: | |
1722 | ||
1723 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPGID> symbol, which | |
1724 | indicates to the C program that the getpgid(pid) function | |
1725 | is available to get the process group id. | |
1726 | ||
1727 | =item C<d_getpgrp2> | |
1728 | ||
1729 | From F<d_getpgrp2.U>: | |
1730 | ||
1731 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_GETPGRP2 symbol, which | |
1732 | indicates to the C program that the getpgrp2() (as in F<DG/C<UX>>) routine | |
1733 | is available to get the current process group. | |
1734 | ||
1735 | =item C<d_getpgrp> | |
1736 | ||
1737 | From F<d_getpgrp.U>: | |
1738 | ||
1739 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPGRP> if getpgrp() is | |
1740 | available to get the current process group. | |
1741 | ||
1742 | =item C<d_getppid> | |
1743 | ||
1744 | From F<d_getppid.U>: | |
1745 | ||
1746 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPPID> symbol, which | |
1747 | indicates to the C program that the getppid() routine is available | |
1748 | to get the parent process C<ID>. | |
1749 | ||
1750 | =item C<d_getprior> | |
1751 | ||
1752 | From F<d_getprior.U>: | |
1753 | ||
1754 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPRIORITY> if getpriority() | |
1755 | is available to get a process's priority. | |
1756 | ||
1757 | =item C<d_getprotobyname_r> | |
1758 | ||
1759 | From F<d_getprotobyname_r.U>: | |
1760 | ||
1761 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNAME_R> symbol, | |
1762 | which indicates to the C program that the getprotobyname_r() | |
1763 | routine is available. | |
1764 | ||
1765 | =item C<d_getprotobynumber_r> | |
1766 | ||
1767 | From F<d_getprotobynumber_r.U>: | |
1768 | ||
1769 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNUMBER_R> symbol, | |
1770 | which indicates to the C program that the getprotobynumber_r() | |
1771 | routine is available. | |
1772 | ||
1773 | =item C<d_getprotoent_r> | |
1774 | ||
1775 | From F<d_getprotoent_r.U>: | |
1776 | ||
1777 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOENT_R> symbol, | |
1778 | which indicates to the C program that the getprotoent_r() | |
1779 | routine is available. | |
1780 | ||
1781 | =item C<d_getprotoprotos> | |
1782 | ||
1783 | From F<d_getprotoprotos.U>: | |
1784 | ||
1785 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTO_PROTOS> symbol, | |
1786 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies | |
1787 | prototypes for the various getproto*() functions. | |
1788 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types. | |
1789 | ||
1790 | =item C<d_getprpwnam> | |
1791 | ||
1792 | From F<d_getprpwnam.U>: | |
1793 | ||
1794 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPRPWNAM> if getprpwnam() is | |
1795 | available to retrieve protected (shadow) password entries by name. | |
1796 | ||
1797 | =item C<d_getpwent> | |
1798 | ||
1799 | From F<d_getpwent.U>: | |
1800 | ||
1801 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWENT> symbol, which | |
1802 | indicates to the C program that the getpwent() routine is available | |
1803 | for sequential access of the passwd database. | |
1804 | ||
1805 | =item C<d_getpwent_r> | |
1806 | ||
1807 | From F<d_getpwent_r.U>: | |
1808 | ||
1809 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWENT_R> symbol, | |
1810 | which indicates to the C program that the getpwent_r() | |
1811 | routine is available. | |
1812 | ||
1813 | =item C<d_getpwnam_r> | |
1814 | ||
1815 | From F<d_getpwnam_r.U>: | |
1816 | ||
1817 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWNAM_R> symbol, | |
1818 | which indicates to the C program that the getpwnam_r() | |
1819 | routine is available. | |
1820 | ||
1821 | =item C<d_getpwuid_r> | |
1822 | ||
1823 | From F<d_getpwuid_r.U>: | |
1824 | ||
1825 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWUID_R> symbol, | |
1826 | which indicates to the C program that the getpwuid_r() | |
1827 | routine is available. | |
1828 | ||
1829 | =item C<d_getsbyname> | |
1830 | ||
1831 | From F<d_getsrvby.U>: | |
1832 | ||
1833 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYNAME> | |
1834 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the | |
1835 | getservbyname() routine is available to look up services | |
1836 | by their name. | |
1837 | ||
1838 | =item C<d_getsbyport> | |
1839 | ||
1840 | From F<d_getsrvby.U>: | |
1841 | ||
1842 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYPORT> | |
1843 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the | |
1844 | getservbyport() routine is available to look up services | |
1845 | by their port. | |
1846 | ||
1847 | =item C<d_getsent> | |
1848 | ||
1849 | From F<d_getsent.U>: | |
1850 | ||
1851 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETSERVENT> if getservent() is | |
1852 | available to look up network services in some data base or another. | |
1853 | ||
1854 | =item C<d_getservbyname_r> | |
1855 | ||
1856 | From F<d_getservbyname_r.U>: | |
1857 | ||
1858 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYNAME_R> symbol, | |
1859 | which indicates to the C program that the getservbyname_r() | |
1860 | routine is available. | |
1861 | ||
1862 | =item C<d_getservbyport_r> | |
1863 | ||
1864 | From F<d_getservbyport_r.U>: | |
1865 | ||
1866 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYPORT_R> symbol, | |
1867 | which indicates to the C program that the getservbyport_r() | |
1868 | routine is available. | |
1869 | ||
1870 | =item C<d_getservent_r> | |
1871 | ||
1872 | From F<d_getservent_r.U>: | |
1873 | ||
1874 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVENT_R> symbol, | |
1875 | which indicates to the C program that the getservent_r() | |
1876 | routine is available. | |
1877 | ||
1878 | =item C<d_getservprotos> | |
1879 | ||
1880 | From F<d_getservprotos.U>: | |
1881 | ||
1882 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERV_PROTOS> symbol, | |
1883 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies | |
1884 | prototypes for the various getserv*() functions. | |
1885 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types. | |
1886 | ||
1887 | =item C<d_getspnam> | |
1888 | ||
1889 | From F<d_getspnam.U>: | |
1890 | ||
1891 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETSPNAM> if getspnam() is | |
1892 | available to retrieve SysV shadow password entries by name. | |
1893 | ||
1894 | =item C<d_getspnam_r> | |
1895 | ||
1896 | From F<d_getspnam_r.U>: | |
1897 | ||
1898 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSPNAM_R> symbol, | |
1899 | which indicates to the C program that the getspnam_r() | |
1900 | routine is available. | |
1901 | ||
1902 | =item C<d_gettimeod> | |
1903 | ||
1904 | From F<d_ftime.U>: | |
1905 | ||
1906 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETTIMEOFDAY> symbol, which | |
1907 | indicates that the gettimeofday() system call exists (to obtain a | |
1908 | sub-second accuracy clock). You should probably include <sys/resource.h>. | |
1909 | ||
1910 | =item C<d_gmtime_r> | |
1911 | ||
1912 | From F<d_gmtime_r.U>: | |
1913 | ||
1914 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GMTIME_R> symbol, | |
1915 | which indicates to the C program that the gmtime_r() | |
1916 | routine is available. | |
1917 | ||
1918 | =item C<d_gnulibc> | |
1919 | ||
1920 | From F<d_gnulibc.U>: | |
1921 | ||
1922 | Defined if we're dealing with the C<GNU> C Library. | |
1923 | ||
1924 | =item C<d_grpasswd> | |
1925 | ||
1926 | From F<i_grp.U>: | |
1927 | ||
1928 | This variable conditionally defines C<GRPASSWD>, which indicates | |
1929 | that struct group in <grp.h> contains gr_passwd. | |
1930 | ||
1931 | =item C<d_hasmntopt> | |
1932 | ||
1933 | From F<d_hasmntopt.U>: | |
1934 | ||
1935 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_HASMNTOPT> symbol, which | |
1936 | indicates to the C program that the hasmntopt() routine is available | |
1937 | to query the mount options of file systems. | |
1938 | ||
1939 | =item C<d_htonl> | |
1940 | ||
1941 | From F<d_htonl.U>: | |
1942 | ||
1943 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_HTONL> if htonl() and its | |
1944 | friends are available to do network order byte swapping. | |
1945 | ||
1946 | =item C<d_ilogbl> | |
1947 | ||
1948 | From F<d_ilogbl.U>: | |
1949 | ||
1950 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ILOGBL> symbol, which | |
1951 | indicates to the C program that the ilogbl() routine is available. | |
1952 | If scalbnl is also present we can emulate frexpl. | |
1953 | ||
1954 | =item C<d_index> | |
1955 | ||
1956 | From F<d_strchr.U>: | |
1957 | ||
1958 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_INDEX> if index() and | |
1959 | rindex() are available for string searching. | |
1960 | ||
1961 | =item C<d_inetaton> | |
1962 | ||
1963 | From F<d_inetaton.U>: | |
1964 | ||
1965 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_INET_ATON> symbol, which | |
1966 | indicates to the C program that the inet_aton() function is available | |
1967 | to parse C<IP> address C<dotted-quad> strings. | |
1968 | ||
1969 | =item C<d_int64_t> | |
1970 | ||
1971 | From F<d_int64_t.U>: | |
1972 | ||
1973 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports int64_t. | |
1974 | ||
1975 | =item C<d_isascii> | |
1976 | ||
1977 | From F<d_isascii.U>: | |
1978 | ||
1979 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISASCII> constant, | |
1980 | which indicates to the C program that isascii() is available. | |
1981 | ||
1982 | =item C<d_isfinite> | |
1983 | ||
1984 | From F<d_isfinite.U>: | |
1985 | ||
1986 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISFINITE> symbol, which | |
1987 | indicates to the C program that the isfinite() routine is available. | |
1988 | ||
1989 | =item C<d_isinf> | |
1990 | ||
1991 | From F<d_isinf.U>: | |
1992 | ||
1993 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISINF> symbol, which | |
1994 | indicates to the C program that the isinf() routine is available. | |
1995 | ||
1996 | =item C<d_isnan> | |
1997 | ||
1998 | From F<d_isnan.U>: | |
1999 | ||
2000 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISNAN> symbol, which | |
2001 | indicates to the C program that the isnan() routine is available. | |
2002 | ||
2003 | =item C<d_isnanl> | |
2004 | ||
2005 | From F<d_isnanl.U>: | |
2006 | ||
2007 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISNANL> symbol, which | |
2008 | indicates to the C program that the isnanl() routine is available. | |
2009 | ||
2010 | =item C<d_killpg> | |
2011 | ||
2012 | From F<d_killpg.U>: | |
2013 | ||
2014 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_KILLPG> symbol, which | |
2015 | indicates to the C program that the killpg() routine is available | |
2016 | to kill process groups. | |
2017 | ||
2018 | =item C<d_lchown> | |
2019 | ||
2020 | From F<d_lchown.U>: | |
2021 | ||
2022 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_LCHOWN> symbol, which | |
2023 | indicates to the C program that the lchown() routine is available | |
2024 | to operate on a symbolic link (instead of following the link). | |
2025 | ||
2026 | =item C<d_ldbl_dig> | |
2027 | ||
2028 | From F<d_ldbl_dig.U>: | |
2029 | ||
2030 | This variable conditionally defines d_ldbl_dig if this system's | |
2031 | header files provide C<LDBL_DIG>, which is the number of significant | |
2032 | digits in a long double precision number. | |
2033 | ||
2034 | =item C<d_link> | |
2035 | ||
2036 | From F<d_link.U>: | |
2037 | ||
2038 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LINK> if link() is | |
2039 | available to create hard links. | |
2040 | ||
2041 | =item C<d_localtime_r> | |
2042 | ||
2043 | From F<d_localtime_r.U>: | |
2044 | ||
2045 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_LOCALTIME_R> symbol, | |
2046 | which indicates to the C program that the localtime_r() | |
2047 | routine is available. | |
2048 | ||
2049 | =item C<d_locconv> | |
2050 | ||
2051 | From F<d_locconv.U>: | |
2052 | ||
2053 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LOCALECONV> if localeconv() is | |
2054 | available for numeric and monetary formatting conventions. | |
2055 | ||
2056 | =item C<d_lockf> | |
2057 | ||
2058 | From F<d_lockf.U>: | |
2059 | ||
2060 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LOCKF> if lockf() is | |
2061 | available to do file locking. | |
2062 | ||
2063 | =item C<d_longdbl> | |
2064 | ||
2065 | From F<d_longdbl.U>: | |
2066 | ||
2067 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LONG_DOUBLE> if | |
2068 | the long double type is supported. | |
2069 | ||
2070 | =item C<d_longlong> | |
2071 | ||
2072 | From F<d_longlong.U>: | |
2073 | ||
2074 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LONG_LONG> if | |
2075 | the long long type is supported. | |
2076 | ||
2077 | =item C<d_lseekproto> | |
2078 | ||
2079 | From F<d_lseekproto.U>: | |
2080 | ||
2081 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_LSEEK_PROTO> symbol, | |
2082 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides | |
2083 | a prototype for the lseek() function. Otherwise, it is | |
2084 | up to the program to supply one. | |
2085 | ||
2086 | =item C<d_lstat> | |
2087 | ||
2088 | From F<d_lstat.U>: | |
2089 | ||
2090 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LSTAT> if lstat() is | |
2091 | available to do file stats on symbolic links. | |
2092 | ||
2093 | =item C<d_madvise> | |
2094 | ||
2095 | From F<d_madvise.U>: | |
2096 | ||
2097 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MADVISE> if madvise() is | |
2098 | available to map a file into memory. | |
2099 | ||
2100 | =item C<d_malloc_size> | |
2101 | ||
2102 | From F<d_malloc_size.U>: | |
2103 | ||
2104 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the malloc_size | |
2105 | routine is available for use. | |
2106 | ||
2107 | =item C<d_malloc_good_size> | |
2108 | ||
2109 | From F<d_malloc_good_size.U>: | |
2110 | ||
2111 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the malloc_good_size | |
2112 | routine is available for use. | |
2113 | ||
2114 | =item C<d_mblen> | |
2115 | ||
2116 | From F<d_mblen.U>: | |
2117 | ||
2118 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MBLEN> symbol, which | |
2119 | indicates to the C program that the mblen() routine is available | |
2120 | to find the number of bytes in a multibye character. | |
2121 | ||
2122 | =item C<d_mbstowcs> | |
2123 | ||
2124 | From F<d_mbstowcs.U>: | |
2125 | ||
2126 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MBSTOWCS> symbol, which | |
2127 | indicates to the C program that the mbstowcs() routine is available | |
2128 | to convert a multibyte string into a wide character string. | |
2129 | ||
2130 | =item C<d_mbtowc> | |
2131 | ||
2132 | From F<d_mbtowc.U>: | |
2133 | ||
2134 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MBTOWC> symbol, which | |
2135 | indicates to the C program that the mbtowc() routine is available | |
2136 | to convert multibyte to a wide character. | |
2137 | ||
2138 | =item C<d_memchr> | |
2139 | ||
2140 | From F<d_memchr.U>: | |
2141 | ||
2142 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMCHR> symbol, which | |
2143 | indicates to the C program that the memchr() routine is available | |
2144 | to locate characters within a C string. | |
2145 | ||
2146 | =item C<d_memcmp> | |
2147 | ||
2148 | From F<d_memcmp.U>: | |
2149 | ||
2150 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMCMP> symbol, which | |
2151 | indicates to the C program that the memcmp() routine is available | |
2152 | to compare blocks of memory. | |
2153 | ||
2154 | =item C<d_memcpy> | |
2155 | ||
2156 | From F<d_memcpy.U>: | |
2157 | ||
2158 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMCPY> symbol, which | |
2159 | indicates to the C program that the memcpy() routine is available | |
2160 | to copy blocks of memory. | |
2161 | ||
2162 | =item C<d_memmove> | |
2163 | ||
2164 | From F<d_memmove.U>: | |
2165 | ||
2166 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMMOVE> symbol, which | |
2167 | indicates to the C program that the memmove() routine is available | |
2168 | to copy potentatially overlapping blocks of memory. | |
2169 | ||
2170 | =item C<d_memset> | |
2171 | ||
2172 | From F<d_memset.U>: | |
2173 | ||
2174 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMSET> symbol, which | |
2175 | indicates to the C program that the memset() routine is available | |
2176 | to set blocks of memory. | |
2177 | ||
2178 | =item C<d_mkdir> | |
2179 | ||
2180 | From F<d_mkdir.U>: | |
2181 | ||
2182 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKDIR> symbol, which | |
2183 | indicates to the C program that the mkdir() routine is available | |
2184 | to create F<directories.>. | |
2185 | ||
2186 | =item C<d_mkdtemp> | |
2187 | ||
2188 | From F<d_mkdtemp.U>: | |
2189 | ||
2190 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKDTEMP> symbol, which | |
2191 | indicates to the C program that the mkdtemp() routine is available | |
2192 | to exclusively create a uniquely named temporary directory. | |
2193 | ||
2194 | =item C<d_mkfifo> | |
2195 | ||
2196 | From F<d_mkfifo.U>: | |
2197 | ||
2198 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKFIFO> symbol, which | |
2199 | indicates to the C program that the mkfifo() routine is available. | |
2200 | ||
2201 | =item C<d_mkstemp> | |
2202 | ||
2203 | From F<d_mkstemp.U>: | |
2204 | ||
2205 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKSTEMP> symbol, which | |
2206 | indicates to the C program that the mkstemp() routine is available | |
2207 | to exclusively create and open a uniquely named temporary file. | |
2208 | ||
2209 | =item C<d_mkstemps> | |
2210 | ||
2211 | From F<d_mkstemps.U>: | |
2212 | ||
2213 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKSTEMPS> symbol, which | |
2214 | indicates to the C program that the mkstemps() routine is available | |
2215 | to exclusively create and open a uniquely named (with a suffix) | |
2216 | temporary file. | |
2217 | ||
2218 | =item C<d_mktime> | |
2219 | ||
2220 | From F<d_mktime.U>: | |
2221 | ||
2222 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKTIME> symbol, which | |
2223 | indicates to the C program that the mktime() routine is available. | |
2224 | ||
2225 | =item C<d_mmap> | |
2226 | ||
2227 | From F<d_mmap.U>: | |
2228 | ||
2229 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MMAP> if mmap() is | |
2230 | available to map a file into memory. | |
2231 | ||
2232 | =item C<d_modfl> | |
2233 | ||
2234 | From F<d_modfl.U>: | |
2235 | ||
2236 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MODFL> symbol, which | |
2237 | indicates to the C program that the modfl() routine is available. | |
2238 | ||
2239 | =item C<d_modfl_pow32_bug> | |
2240 | ||
2241 | From F<d_modfl.U>: | |
2242 | ||
2243 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_MODFL_POW32_BUG symbol, | |
2244 | which indicates that modfl() is broken for long doubles >= pow(2, 32). | |
2245 | For example from 4294967303.150000 one would get 4294967302.000000 | |
2246 | and 1.150000. The bug has been seen in certain versions of glibc, | |
2247 | release 2.2.2 is known to be okay. | |
2248 | ||
2249 | =item C<d_modflproto> | |
2250 | ||
2251 | From F<d_modfl.U>: | |
2252 | ||
2253 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the system provides | |
2254 | a prototype for the modfl() function. Otherwise, it is up | |
2255 | to the program to supply one. C99 says it should be | |
2256 | long double modfl(long double, long double *); | |
2257 | ||
2258 | =item C<d_mprotect> | |
2259 | ||
2260 | From F<d_mprotect.U>: | |
2261 | ||
2262 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MPROTECT> if mprotect() is | |
2263 | available to modify the access protection of a memory mapped file. | |
2264 | ||
2265 | =item C<d_msg> | |
2266 | ||
2267 | From F<d_msg.U>: | |
2268 | ||
2269 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG> symbol, which | |
2270 | indicates that the entire msg*(2) library is present. | |
2271 | ||
2272 | =item C<d_msg_ctrunc> | |
2273 | ||
2274 | From F<d_socket.U>: | |
2275 | ||
2276 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_CTRUNC> symbol, | |
2277 | which indicates that the C<MSG_CTRUNC> is available. #ifdef is | |
2278 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. | |
2279 | ||
2280 | =item C<d_msg_dontroute> | |
2281 | ||
2282 | From F<d_socket.U>: | |
2283 | ||
2284 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_DONTROUTE> symbol, | |
2285 | which indicates that the C<MSG_DONTROUTE> is available. #ifdef is | |
2286 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. | |
2287 | ||
2288 | =item C<d_msg_oob> | |
2289 | ||
2290 | From F<d_socket.U>: | |
2291 | ||
2292 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_OOB> symbol, | |
2293 | which indicates that the C<MSG_OOB> is available. #ifdef is | |
2294 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. | |
2295 | ||
2296 | =item C<d_msg_peek> | |
2297 | ||
2298 | From F<d_socket.U>: | |
2299 | ||
2300 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_PEEK> symbol, | |
2301 | which indicates that the C<MSG_PEEK> is available. #ifdef is | |
2302 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. | |
2303 | ||
2304 | =item C<d_msg_proxy> | |
2305 | ||
2306 | From F<d_socket.U>: | |
2307 | ||
2308 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_PROXY> symbol, | |
2309 | which indicates that the C<MSG_PROXY> is available. #ifdef is | |
2310 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. | |
2311 | ||
2312 | =item C<d_msgctl> | |
2313 | ||
2314 | From F<d_msgctl.U>: | |
2315 | ||
2316 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGCTL> symbol, which | |
2317 | indicates to the C program that the msgctl() routine is available. | |
2318 | ||
2319 | =item C<d_msgget> | |
2320 | ||
2321 | From F<d_msgget.U>: | |
2322 | ||
2323 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGGET> symbol, which | |
2324 | indicates to the C program that the msgget() routine is available. | |
2325 | ||
2326 | =item C<d_msghdr_s> | |
2327 | ||
2328 | From F<d_msghdr_s.U>: | |
2329 | ||
2330 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_MSGHDR> symbol, | |
2331 | which indicates that the struct msghdr is supported. | |
2332 | ||
2333 | =item C<d_msgrcv> | |
2334 | ||
2335 | From F<d_msgrcv.U>: | |
2336 | ||
2337 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGRCV> symbol, which | |
2338 | indicates to the C program that the msgrcv() routine is available. | |
2339 | ||
2340 | =item C<d_msgsnd> | |
2341 | ||
2342 | From F<d_msgsnd.U>: | |
2343 | ||
2344 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGSND> symbol, which | |
2345 | indicates to the C program that the msgsnd() routine is available. | |
2346 | ||
2347 | =item C<d_msync> | |
2348 | ||
2349 | From F<d_msync.U>: | |
2350 | ||
2351 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MSYNC> if msync() is | |
2352 | available to synchronize a mapped file. | |
2353 | ||
2354 | =item C<d_munmap> | |
2355 | ||
2356 | From F<d_munmap.U>: | |
2357 | ||
2358 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MUNMAP> if munmap() is | |
2359 | available to unmap a region mapped by mmap(). | |
2360 | ||
2361 | =item C<d_mymalloc> | |
2362 | ||
2363 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: | |
2364 | ||
2365 | This variable conditionally defines C<MYMALLOC> in case other parts | |
2366 | of the source want to take special action if C<MYMALLOC> is used. | |
2367 | This may include different sorts of profiling or error detection. | |
2368 | ||
2369 | =item C<d_nanosleep> | |
2370 | ||
2371 | From F<d_nanosleep.U>: | |
2372 | ||
2373 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_NANOSLEEP> | |
2374 | if nanosleep() is available to sleep with 1E-9 sec accuracy. | |
2375 | ||
2376 | =item C<d_nice> | |
2377 | ||
2378 | From F<d_nice.U>: | |
2379 | ||
2380 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_NICE> symbol, which | |
2381 | indicates to the C program that the nice() routine is available. | |
2382 | ||
2383 | =item C<d_nl_langinfo> | |
2384 | ||
2385 | From F<d_nl_langinfo.U>: | |
2386 | ||
2387 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_NL_LANGINFO> symbol, which | |
2388 | indicates to the C program that the nl_langinfo() routine is available. | |
2389 | ||
2390 | =item C<d_nv_preserves_uv> | |
2391 | ||
2392 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
2393 | ||
2394 | This variable indicates whether a variable of type nvtype | |
2395 | can preserve all the bits a variable of type uvtype. | |
2396 | ||
2397 | =item C<d_nv_zero_is_allbits_zero> | |
2398 | ||
2399 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
2400 | ||
2401 | This variable indicates whether a variable of type nvtype | |
2402 | stores 0.0 in memory as all bits zero. | |
2403 | ||
2404 | =item C<d_off64_t> | |
2405 | ||
2406 | From F<d_off64_t.U>: | |
2407 | ||
2408 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports off64_t. | |
2409 | ||
2410 | =item C<d_old_pthread_create_joinable> | |
2411 | ||
2412 | From F<d_pthrattrj.U>: | |
2413 | ||
2414 | This variable conditionally defines pthread_create_joinable. | |
2415 | undef if F<pthread.h> defines C<PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE>. | |
2416 | ||
2417 | =item C<d_oldpthreads> | |
2418 | ||
2419 | From F<usethreads.U>: | |
2420 | ||
2421 | This variable conditionally defines the C<OLD_PTHREADS_API> symbol, | |
2422 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use the old | |
2423 | draft C<POSIX> threads C<API>. This is only potentially meaningful if | |
2424 | usethreads is set. | |
2425 | ||
2426 | =item C<d_oldsock> | |
2427 | ||
2428 | From F<d_socket.U>: | |
2429 | ||
2430 | This variable conditionally defines the C<OLDSOCKET> symbol, which | |
2431 | indicates that the C<BSD> socket interface is based on 4.1c and not 4.2. | |
2432 | ||
2433 | =item C<d_open3> | |
2434 | ||
2435 | From F<d_open3.U>: | |
2436 | ||
2437 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_OPEN3 manifest constant, | |
2438 | which indicates to the C program that the 3 argument version of | |
2439 | the open(2) function is available. | |
2440 | ||
2441 | =item C<d_pathconf> | |
2442 | ||
2443 | From F<d_pathconf.U>: | |
2444 | ||
2445 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PATHCONF> symbol, which | |
2446 | indicates to the C program that the pathconf() routine is available | |
2447 | to determine file-system related limits and options associated | |
2448 | with a given filename. | |
2449 | ||
2450 | =item C<d_pause> | |
2451 | ||
2452 | From F<d_pause.U>: | |
2453 | ||
2454 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PAUSE> symbol, which | |
2455 | indicates to the C program that the pause() routine is available | |
2456 | to suspend a process until a signal is received. | |
2457 | ||
2458 | =item C<d_perl_otherlibdirs> | |
2459 | ||
2460 | From F<otherlibdirs.U>: | |
2461 | ||
2462 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_OTHERLIBDIRS>, which | |
2463 | contains a colon-separated set of paths for the perl binary to | |
2464 | include in @C<INC>. See also otherlibdirs. | |
2465 | ||
2466 | =item C<d_phostname> | |
2467 | ||
2468 | From F<d_gethname.U>: | |
2469 | ||
2470 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PHOSTNAME> symbol, which | |
2471 | contains the shell command which, when fed to popen(), may be | |
2472 | used to derive the host name. | |
2473 | ||
2474 | =item C<d_pipe> | |
2475 | ||
2476 | From F<d_pipe.U>: | |
2477 | ||
2478 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PIPE> symbol, which | |
2479 | indicates to the C program that the pipe() routine is available | |
2480 | to create an inter-process channel. | |
2481 | ||
2482 | =item C<d_poll> | |
2483 | ||
2484 | From F<d_poll.U>: | |
2485 | ||
2486 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_POLL> symbol, which | |
2487 | indicates to the C program that the poll() routine is available | |
2488 | to poll active file descriptors. | |
2489 | ||
2490 | =item C<d_portable> | |
2491 | ||
2492 | From F<d_portable.U>: | |
2493 | ||
2494 | This variable conditionally defines the C<PORTABLE> symbol, which | |
2495 | indicates to the C program that it should not assume that it is | |
2496 | running on the machine it was compiled on. | |
2497 | ||
2498 | =item C<d_PRId64> | |
2499 | ||
2500 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
2501 | ||
2502 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRId64 symbol, which | |
2503 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit decimal numbers. | |
2504 | ||
2505 | =item C<d_PRIeldbl> | |
2506 | ||
2507 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
2508 | ||
2509 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which | |
2510 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. | |
2511 | ||
2512 | =item C<d_PRIEUldbl> | |
2513 | ||
2514 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
2515 | ||
2516 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which | |
2517 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. | |
2518 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIeldbl so that even | |
2519 | case-blind systems can see the difference. | |
2520 | ||
2521 | =item C<d_PRIfldbl> | |
2522 | ||
2523 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
2524 | ||
2525 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which | |
2526 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. | |
2527 | ||
2528 | =item C<d_PRIFUldbl> | |
2529 | ||
2530 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
2531 | ||
2532 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which | |
2533 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. | |
2534 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIfldbl so that even | |
2535 | case-blind systems can see the difference. | |
2536 | ||
2537 | =item C<d_PRIgldbl> | |
2538 | ||
2539 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
2540 | ||
2541 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which | |
2542 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. | |
2543 | ||
2544 | =item C<d_PRIGUldbl> | |
2545 | ||
2546 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
2547 | ||
2548 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which | |
2549 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. | |
2550 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIgldbl so that even | |
2551 | case-blind systems can see the difference. | |
2552 | ||
2553 | =item C<d_PRIi64> | |
2554 | ||
2555 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
2556 | ||
2557 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIi64 symbol, which | |
2558 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit decimal numbers. | |
2559 | ||
2560 | =item C<d_PRIo64> | |
2561 | ||
2562 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
2563 | ||
2564 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIo64 symbol, which | |
2565 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit octal numbers. | |
2566 | ||
2567 | =item C<d_PRIu64> | |
2568 | ||
2569 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
2570 | ||
2571 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIu64 symbol, which | |
2572 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit unsigned decimal | |
2573 | numbers. | |
2574 | ||
2575 | =item C<d_PRIx64> | |
2576 | ||
2577 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
2578 | ||
2579 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIx64 symbol, which | |
2580 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit hexadecimal numbers. | |
2581 | ||
2582 | =item C<d_PRIXU64> | |
2583 | ||
2584 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
2585 | ||
2586 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIXU64 symbol, which | |
2587 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit hExADECimAl numbers. | |
2588 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIx64 so that even | |
2589 | case-blind systems can see the difference. | |
2590 | ||
2591 | =item C<d_procselfexe> | |
2592 | ||
2593 | From F<d_procselfexe.U>: | |
2594 | ||
2595 | Defined if $procselfexe is symlink to the absolute | |
2596 | pathname of the executing program. | |
2597 | ||
2598 | =item C<d_pthread_atfork> | |
2599 | ||
2600 | From F<d_pthread_atfork.U>: | |
2601 | ||
2602 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PTHREAD_ATFORK> symbol, | |
2603 | which indicates to the C program that the pthread_atfork() | |
2604 | routine is available. | |
2605 | ||
2606 | =item C<d_pthread_attr_setscope> | |
2607 | ||
2608 | From F<d_pthread_attr_ss.U>: | |
2609 | ||
2610 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_PTHREAD_ATTR_SETSCOPE> if | |
2611 | pthread_attr_setscope() is available to set the contention scope | |
2612 | attribute of a thread attribute object. | |
2613 | ||
2614 | =item C<d_pthread_yield> | |
2615 | ||
2616 | From F<d_pthread_y.U>: | |
2617 | ||
2618 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PTHREAD_YIELD> | |
2619 | symbol if the pthread_yield routine is available to yield | |
2620 | the execution of the current thread. | |
2621 | ||
2622 | =item C<d_pwage> | |
2623 | ||
2624 | From F<i_pwd.U>: | |
2625 | ||
2626 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWAGE>, which indicates | |
2627 | that struct passwd contains pw_age. | |
2628 | ||
2629 | =item C<d_pwchange> | |
2630 | ||
2631 | From F<i_pwd.U>: | |
2632 | ||
2633 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWCHANGE>, which indicates | |
2634 | that struct passwd contains pw_change. | |
2635 | ||
2636 | =item C<d_pwclass> | |
2637 | ||
2638 | From F<i_pwd.U>: | |
2639 | ||
2640 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWCLASS>, which indicates | |
2641 | that struct passwd contains pw_class. | |
2642 | ||
2643 | =item C<d_pwcomment> | |
2644 | ||
2645 | From F<i_pwd.U>: | |
2646 | ||
2647 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWCOMMENT>, which indicates | |
2648 | that struct passwd contains pw_comment. | |
2649 | ||
2650 | =item C<d_pwexpire> | |
2651 | ||
2652 | From F<i_pwd.U>: | |
2653 | ||
2654 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWEXPIRE>, which indicates | |
2655 | that struct passwd contains pw_expire. | |
2656 | ||
2657 | =item C<d_pwgecos> | |
2658 | ||
2659 | From F<i_pwd.U>: | |
2660 | ||
2661 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWGECOS>, which indicates | |
2662 | that struct passwd contains pw_gecos. | |
2663 | ||
2664 | =item C<d_pwpasswd> | |
2665 | ||
2666 | From F<i_pwd.U>: | |
2667 | ||
2668 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWPASSWD>, which indicates | |
2669 | that struct passwd contains pw_passwd. | |
2670 | ||
2671 | =item C<d_pwquota> | |
2672 | ||
2673 | From F<i_pwd.U>: | |
2674 | ||
2675 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWQUOTA>, which indicates | |
2676 | that struct passwd contains pw_quota. | |
2677 | ||
2678 | =item C<d_qgcvt> | |
2679 | ||
2680 | From F<d_qgcvt.U>: | |
2681 | ||
2682 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_QGCVT> symbol, which | |
2683 | indicates to the C program that the qgcvt() routine is available. | |
2684 | ||
2685 | =item C<d_quad> | |
2686 | ||
2687 | From F<quadtype.U>: | |
2688 | ||
2689 | This variable, if defined, tells that there's a 64-bit integer type, | |
2690 | quadtype. | |
2691 | ||
2692 | =item C<d_random_r> | |
2693 | ||
2694 | From F<d_random_r.U>: | |
2695 | ||
2696 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_RANDOM_R> symbol, | |
2697 | which indicates to the C program that the random_r() | |
2698 | routine is available. | |
2699 | ||
2700 | =item C<d_readdir64_r> | |
2701 | ||
2702 | From F<d_readdir64_r.U>: | |
2703 | ||
2704 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_READDIR64_R symbol, | |
2705 | which indicates to the C program that the readdir64_r() | |
2706 | routine is available. | |
2707 | ||
2708 | =item C<d_readdir> | |
2709 | ||
2710 | From F<d_readdir.U>: | |
2711 | ||
2712 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_READDIR> if readdir() is | |
2713 | available to read directory entries. | |
2714 | ||
2715 | =item C<d_readdir_r> | |
2716 | ||
2717 | From F<d_readdir_r.U>: | |
2718 | ||
2719 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_READDIR_R> symbol, | |
2720 | which indicates to the C program that the readdir_r() | |
2721 | routine is available. | |
2722 | ||
2723 | =item C<d_readlink> | |
2724 | ||
2725 | From F<d_readlink.U>: | |
2726 | ||
2727 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_READLINK> symbol, which | |
2728 | indicates to the C program that the readlink() routine is available | |
2729 | to read the value of a symbolic link. | |
2730 | ||
2731 | =item C<d_readv> | |
2732 | ||
2733 | From F<d_readv.U>: | |
2734 | ||
2735 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_READV> symbol, which | |
2736 | indicates to the C program that the readv() routine is available. | |
2737 | ||
2738 | =item C<d_recvmsg> | |
2739 | ||
2740 | From F<d_recvmsg.U>: | |
2741 | ||
2742 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_RECVMSG> symbol, which | |
2743 | indicates to the C program that the recvmsg() routine is available. | |
2744 | ||
2745 | =item C<d_rename> | |
2746 | ||
2747 | From F<d_rename.U>: | |
2748 | ||
2749 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_RENAME> symbol, which | |
2750 | indicates to the C program that the rename() routine is available | |
2751 | to rename files. | |
2752 | ||
2753 | =item C<d_rewinddir> | |
2754 | ||
2755 | From F<d_readdir.U>: | |
2756 | ||
2757 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_REWINDDIR> if rewinddir() is | |
2758 | available. | |
2759 | ||
2760 | =item C<d_rmdir> | |
2761 | ||
2762 | From F<d_rmdir.U>: | |
2763 | ||
2764 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_RMDIR> if rmdir() is | |
2765 | available to remove directories. | |
2766 | ||
2767 | =item C<d_safebcpy> | |
2768 | ||
2769 | From F<d_safebcpy.U>: | |
2770 | ||
2771 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SAFE_BCOPY> symbol if | |
2772 | the bcopy() routine can do overlapping copies. Normally, you | |
2773 | should probably use memmove(). | |
2774 | ||
2775 | =item C<d_safemcpy> | |
2776 | ||
2777 | From F<d_safemcpy.U>: | |
2778 | ||
2779 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SAFE_MEMCPY> symbol if | |
2780 | the memcpy() routine can do overlapping copies. | |
2781 | For overlapping copies, memmove() should be used, if available. | |
2782 | ||
2783 | =item C<d_sanemcmp> | |
2784 | ||
2785 | From F<d_sanemcmp.U>: | |
2786 | ||
2787 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SANE_MEMCMP> symbol if | |
2788 | the memcpy() routine is available and can be used to compare relative | |
2789 | magnitudes of chars with their high bits set. | |
2790 | ||
2791 | =item C<d_sbrkproto> | |
2792 | ||
2793 | From F<d_sbrkproto.U>: | |
2794 | ||
2795 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SBRK_PROTO> symbol, | |
2796 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides | |
2797 | a prototype for the sbrk() function. Otherwise, it is | |
2798 | up to the program to supply one. | |
2799 | ||
2800 | =item C<d_scalbnl> | |
2801 | ||
2802 | From F<d_scalbnl.U>: | |
2803 | ||
2804 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SCALBNL> symbol, which | |
2805 | indicates to the C program that the scalbnl() routine is available. | |
2806 | If ilogbl is also present we can emulate frexpl. | |
2807 | ||
2808 | =item C<d_sched_yield> | |
2809 | ||
2810 | From F<d_pthread_y.U>: | |
2811 | ||
2812 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SCHED_YIELD> | |
2813 | symbol if the sched_yield routine is available to yield | |
2814 | the execution of the current thread. | |
2815 | ||
2816 | =item C<d_scm_rights> | |
2817 | ||
2818 | From F<d_socket.U>: | |
2819 | ||
2820 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SCM_RIGHTS> symbol, | |
2821 | which indicates that the C<SCM_RIGHTS> is available. #ifdef is | |
2822 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. | |
2823 | ||
2824 | =item C<d_SCNfldbl> | |
2825 | ||
2826 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
2827 | ||
2828 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which | |
2829 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to scan long doubles. | |
2830 | ||
2831 | =item C<d_seekdir> | |
2832 | ||
2833 | From F<d_readdir.U>: | |
2834 | ||
2835 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SEEKDIR> if seekdir() is | |
2836 | available. | |
2837 | ||
2838 | =item C<d_select> | |
2839 | ||
2840 | From F<d_select.U>: | |
2841 | ||
2842 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SELECT> if select() is | |
2843 | available to select active file descriptors. A <sys/time.h> | |
2844 | inclusion may be necessary for the timeout field. | |
2845 | ||
2846 | =item C<d_sem> | |
2847 | ||
2848 | From F<d_sem.U>: | |
2849 | ||
2850 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEM> symbol, which | |
2851 | indicates that the entire sem*(2) library is present. | |
2852 | ||
2853 | =item C<d_semctl> | |
2854 | ||
2855 | From F<d_semctl.U>: | |
2856 | ||
2857 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEMCTL> symbol, which | |
2858 | indicates to the C program that the semctl() routine is available. | |
2859 | ||
2860 | =item C<d_semctl_semid_ds> | |
2861 | ||
2862 | From F<d_union_semun.U>: | |
2863 | ||
2864 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_SEMCTL_SEMID_DS>, which | |
2865 | indicates that struct semid_ds * is to be used for semctl C<IPC_STAT>. | |
2866 | ||
2867 | =item C<d_semctl_semun> | |
2868 | ||
2869 | From F<d_union_semun.U>: | |
2870 | ||
2871 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_SEMCTL_SEMUN>, which | |
2872 | indicates that union semun is to be used for semctl C<IPC_STAT>. | |
2873 | ||
2874 | =item C<d_semget> | |
2875 | ||
2876 | From F<d_semget.U>: | |
2877 | ||
2878 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEMGET> symbol, which | |
2879 | indicates to the C program that the semget() routine is available. | |
2880 | ||
2881 | =item C<d_semop> | |
2882 | ||
2883 | From F<d_semop.U>: | |
2884 | ||
2885 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEMOP> symbol, which | |
2886 | indicates to the C program that the semop() routine is available. | |
2887 | ||
2888 | =item C<d_sendmsg> | |
2889 | ||
2890 | From F<d_sendmsg.U>: | |
2891 | ||
2892 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SENDMSG> symbol, which | |
2893 | indicates to the C program that the sendmsg() routine is available. | |
2894 | ||
2895 | =item C<d_setegid> | |
2896 | ||
2897 | From F<d_setegid.U>: | |
2898 | ||
2899 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETEGID> symbol, which | |
2900 | indicates to the C program that the setegid() routine is available | |
2901 | to change the effective gid of the current program. | |
2902 | ||
2903 | =item C<d_seteuid> | |
2904 | ||
2905 | From F<d_seteuid.U>: | |
2906 | ||
2907 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETEUID> symbol, which | |
2908 | indicates to the C program that the seteuid() routine is available | |
2909 | to change the effective uid of the current program. | |
2910 | ||
2911 | =item C<d_setgrent> | |
2912 | ||
2913 | From F<d_setgrent.U>: | |
2914 | ||
2915 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETGRENT> symbol, which | |
2916 | indicates to the C program that the setgrent() routine is available | |
2917 | for initializing sequential access to the group database. | |
2918 | ||
2919 | =item C<d_setgrent_r> | |
2920 | ||
2921 | From F<d_setgrent_r.U>: | |
2922 | ||
2923 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETGRENT_R> symbol, | |
2924 | which indicates to the C program that the setgrent_r() | |
2925 | routine is available. | |
2926 | ||
2927 | =item C<d_setgrps> | |
2928 | ||
2929 | From F<d_setgrps.U>: | |
2930 | ||
2931 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETGROUPS> symbol, which | |
2932 | indicates to the C program that the setgroups() routine is available | |
2933 | to set the list of process groups. | |
2934 | ||
2935 | =item C<d_sethent> | |
2936 | ||
2937 | From F<d_sethent.U>: | |
2938 | ||
2939 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETHOSTENT> if sethostent() is | |
2940 | available. | |
2941 | ||
2942 | =item C<d_sethostent_r> | |
2943 | ||
2944 | From F<d_sethostent_r.U>: | |
2945 | ||
2946 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETHOSTENT_R> symbol, | |
2947 | which indicates to the C program that the sethostent_r() | |
2948 | routine is available. | |
2949 | ||
2950 | =item C<d_setitimer> | |
2951 | ||
2952 | From F<d_setitimer.U>: | |
2953 | ||
2954 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETITIMER> symbol, which | |
2955 | indicates to the C program that the setitimer() routine is available. | |
2956 | ||
2957 | =item C<d_setlinebuf> | |
2958 | ||
2959 | From F<d_setlnbuf.U>: | |
2960 | ||
2961 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETLINEBUF> symbol, which | |
2962 | indicates to the C program that the setlinebuf() routine is available | |
2963 | to change stderr or stdout from block-buffered or unbuffered to a | |
2964 | line-buffered mode. | |
2965 | ||
2966 | =item C<d_setlocale> | |
2967 | ||
2968 | From F<d_setlocale.U>: | |
2969 | ||
2970 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETLOCALE> if setlocale() is | |
2971 | available to handle locale-specific ctype implementations. | |
2972 | ||
2973 | =item C<d_setlocale_r> | |
2974 | ||
2975 | From F<d_setlocale_r.U>: | |
2976 | ||
2977 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETLOCALE_R> symbol, | |
2978 | which indicates to the C program that the setlocale_r() | |
2979 | routine is available. | |
2980 | ||
2981 | =item C<d_setnent> | |
2982 | ||
2983 | From F<d_setnent.U>: | |
2984 | ||
2985 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETNETENT> if setnetent() is | |
2986 | available. | |
2987 | ||
2988 | =item C<d_setnetent_r> | |
2989 | ||
2990 | From F<d_setnetent_r.U>: | |
2991 | ||
2992 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETNETENT_R> symbol, | |
2993 | which indicates to the C program that the setnetent_r() | |
2994 | routine is available. | |
2995 | ||
2996 | =item C<d_setpent> | |
2997 | ||
2998 | From F<d_setpent.U>: | |
2999 | ||
3000 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETPROTOENT> if setprotoent() is | |
3001 | available. | |
3002 | ||
3003 | =item C<d_setpgid> | |
3004 | ||
3005 | From F<d_setpgid.U>: | |
3006 | ||
3007 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPGID> symbol if the | |
3008 | setpgid(pid, gpid) function is available to set process group C<ID>. | |
3009 | ||
3010 | =item C<d_setpgrp2> | |
3011 | ||
3012 | From F<d_setpgrp2.U>: | |
3013 | ||
3014 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_SETPGRP2 symbol, which | |
3015 | indicates to the C program that the setpgrp2() (as in F<DG/C<UX>>) routine | |
3016 | is available to set the current process group. | |
3017 | ||
3018 | =item C<d_setpgrp> | |
3019 | ||
3020 | From F<d_setpgrp.U>: | |
3021 | ||
3022 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETPGRP> if setpgrp() is | |
3023 | available to set the current process group. | |
3024 | ||
3025 | =item C<d_setprior> | |
3026 | ||
3027 | From F<d_setprior.U>: | |
3028 | ||
3029 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETPRIORITY> if setpriority() | |
3030 | is available to set a process's priority. | |
3031 | ||
3032 | =item C<d_setproctitle> | |
3033 | ||
3034 | From F<d_setproctitle.U>: | |
3035 | ||
3036 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPROCTITLE> symbol, | |
3037 | which indicates to the C program that the setproctitle() routine | |
3038 | is available. | |
3039 | ||
3040 | =item C<d_setprotoent_r> | |
3041 | ||
3042 | From F<d_setprotoent_r.U>: | |
3043 | ||
3044 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPROTOENT_R> symbol, | |
3045 | which indicates to the C program that the setprotoent_r() | |
3046 | routine is available. | |
3047 | ||
3048 | =item C<d_setpwent> | |
3049 | ||
3050 | From F<d_setpwent.U>: | |
3051 | ||
3052 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPWENT> symbol, which | |
3053 | indicates to the C program that the setpwent() routine is available | |
3054 | for initializing sequential access to the passwd database. | |
3055 | ||
3056 | =item C<d_setpwent_r> | |
3057 | ||
3058 | From F<d_setpwent_r.U>: | |
3059 | ||
3060 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPWENT_R> symbol, | |
3061 | which indicates to the C program that the setpwent_r() | |
3062 | routine is available. | |
3063 | ||
3064 | =item C<d_setregid> | |
3065 | ||
3066 | From F<d_setregid.U>: | |
3067 | ||
3068 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETREGID> if setregid() is | |
3069 | available to change the real and effective gid of the current | |
3070 | process. | |
3071 | ||
3072 | =item C<d_setresgid> | |
3073 | ||
3074 | From F<d_setregid.U>: | |
3075 | ||
3076 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETRESGID> if setresgid() is | |
3077 | available to change the real, effective and saved gid of the current | |
3078 | process. | |
3079 | ||
3080 | =item C<d_setresuid> | |
3081 | ||
3082 | From F<d_setreuid.U>: | |
3083 | ||
3084 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETREUID> if setresuid() is | |
3085 | available to change the real, effective and saved uid of the current | |
3086 | process. | |
3087 | ||
3088 | =item C<d_setreuid> | |
3089 | ||
3090 | From F<d_setreuid.U>: | |
3091 | ||
3092 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETREUID> if setreuid() is | |
3093 | available to change the real and effective uid of the current | |
3094 | process. | |
3095 | ||
3096 | =item C<d_setrgid> | |
3097 | ||
3098 | From F<d_setrgid.U>: | |
3099 | ||
3100 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRGID> symbol, which | |
3101 | indicates to the C program that the setrgid() routine is available | |
3102 | to change the real gid of the current program. | |
3103 | ||
3104 | =item C<d_setruid> | |
3105 | ||
3106 | From F<d_setruid.U>: | |
3107 | ||
3108 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRUID> symbol, which | |
3109 | indicates to the C program that the setruid() routine is available | |
3110 | to change the real uid of the current program. | |
3111 | ||
3112 | =item C<d_setsent> | |
3113 | ||
3114 | From F<d_setsent.U>: | |
3115 | ||
3116 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETSERVENT> if setservent() is | |
3117 | available. | |
3118 | ||
3119 | =item C<d_setservent_r> | |
3120 | ||
3121 | From F<d_setservent_r.U>: | |
3122 | ||
3123 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETSERVENT_R> symbol, | |
3124 | which indicates to the C program that the setservent_r() | |
3125 | routine is available. | |
3126 | ||
3127 | =item C<d_setsid> | |
3128 | ||
3129 | From F<d_setsid.U>: | |
3130 | ||
3131 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETSID> if setsid() is | |
3132 | available to set the process group C<ID>. | |
3133 | ||
3134 | =item C<d_setvbuf> | |
3135 | ||
3136 | From F<d_setvbuf.U>: | |
3137 | ||
3138 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETVBUF> symbol, which | |
3139 | indicates to the C program that the setvbuf() routine is available | |
3140 | to change buffering on an open stdio stream. | |
3141 | ||
3142 | =item C<d_sfio> | |
3143 | ||
3144 | From F<d_sfio.U>: | |
3145 | ||
3146 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_SFIO> symbol, | |
3147 | and indicates whether sfio is available (and should be used). | |
3148 | ||
3149 | =item C<d_shm> | |
3150 | ||
3151 | From F<d_shm.U>: | |
3152 | ||
3153 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHM> symbol, which | |
3154 | indicates that the entire shm*(2) library is present. | |
3155 | ||
3156 | =item C<d_shmat> | |
3157 | ||
3158 | From F<d_shmat.U>: | |
3159 | ||
3160 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMAT> symbol, which | |
3161 | indicates to the C program that the shmat() routine is available. | |
3162 | ||
3163 | =item C<d_shmatprototype> | |
3164 | ||
3165 | From F<d_shmat.U>: | |
3166 | ||
3167 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMAT_PROTOTYPE> | |
3168 | symbol, which indicates that F<sys/shm.h> has a prototype for | |
3169 | shmat. | |
3170 | ||
3171 | =item C<d_shmctl> | |
3172 | ||
3173 | From F<d_shmctl.U>: | |
3174 | ||
3175 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMCTL> symbol, which | |
3176 | indicates to the C program that the shmctl() routine is available. | |
3177 | ||
3178 | =item C<d_shmdt> | |
3179 | ||
3180 | From F<d_shmdt.U>: | |
3181 | ||
3182 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMDT> symbol, which | |
3183 | indicates to the C program that the shmdt() routine is available. | |
3184 | ||
3185 | =item C<d_shmget> | |
3186 | ||
3187 | From F<d_shmget.U>: | |
3188 | ||
3189 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMGET> symbol, which | |
3190 | indicates to the C program that the shmget() routine is available. | |
3191 | ||
3192 | =item C<d_sigaction> | |
3193 | ||
3194 | From F<d_sigaction.U>: | |
3195 | ||
3196 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SIGACTION> symbol, which | |
3197 | indicates that the Vr4 sigaction() routine is available. | |
3198 | ||
3199 | =item C<d_sigprocmask> | |
3200 | ||
3201 | From F<d_sigprocmask.U>: | |
3202 | ||
3203 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SIGPROCMASK> | |
3204 | if sigprocmask() is available to examine or change the signal mask | |
3205 | of the calling process. | |
3206 | ||
3207 | =item C<d_sigsetjmp> | |
3208 | ||
3209 | From F<d_sigsetjmp.U>: | |
3210 | ||
3211 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SIGSETJMP> symbol, | |
3212 | which indicates that the sigsetjmp() routine is available to | |
3213 | call setjmp() and optionally save the process's signal mask. | |
3214 | ||
3215 | =item C<d_sockatmark> | |
3216 | ||
3217 | From F<d_sockatmark.U>: | |
3218 | ||
3219 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SOCKATMARK> symbol, which | |
3220 | indicates to the C program that the sockatmark() routine is available. | |
3221 | ||
3222 | =item C<d_sockatmarkproto> | |
3223 | ||
3224 | From F<d_sockatmarkproto.U>: | |
3225 | ||
3226 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SOCKATMARK_PROTO> symbol, | |
3227 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides | |
3228 | a prototype for the sockatmark() function. Otherwise, it is | |
3229 | up to the program to supply one. | |
3230 | ||
3231 | =item C<d_socket> | |
3232 | ||
3233 | From F<d_socket.U>: | |
3234 | ||
3235 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SOCKET>, which indicates | |
3236 | that the C<BSD> socket interface is supported. | |
3237 | ||
3238 | =item C<d_socklen_t> | |
3239 | ||
3240 | From F<d_socklen_t.U>: | |
3241 | ||
3242 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports socklen_t. | |
3243 | ||
3244 | =item C<d_sockpair> | |
3245 | ||
3246 | From F<d_socket.U>: | |
3247 | ||
3248 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SOCKETPAIR> symbol, which | |
3249 | indicates that the C<BSD> socketpair() is supported. | |
3250 | ||
3251 | =item C<d_socks5_init> | |
3252 | ||
3253 | From F<d_socks5_init.U>: | |
3254 | ||
3255 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_SOCKS5_INIT symbol, which | |
3256 | indicates to the C program that the socks5_init() routine is available. | |
3257 | ||
3258 | =item C<d_sprintf_returns_strlen> | |
3259 | ||
3260 | From F<d_sprintf_returns_strlen.U>: | |
3261 | ||
3262 | This variable defines whether sprintf returns the length of the string | |
3263 | (as per the C<ANSI> spec). Some C libraries retain compatibility with | |
3264 | pre-C<ANSI> C and return a pointer to the passed in buffer; for these | |
3265 | this variable will be undef. | |
3266 | ||
3267 | =item C<d_sqrtl> | |
3268 | ||
3269 | From F<d_sqrtl.U>: | |
3270 | ||
3271 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SQRTL> symbol, which | |
3272 | indicates to the C program that the sqrtl() routine is available. | |
3273 | ||
3274 | =item C<d_srand48_r> | |
3275 | ||
3276 | From F<d_srand48_r.U>: | |
3277 | ||
3278 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_SRAND48_R symbol, | |
3279 | which indicates to the C program that the srand48_r() | |
3280 | routine is available. | |
3281 | ||
3282 | =item C<d_srandom_r> | |
3283 | ||
3284 | From F<d_srandom_r.U>: | |
3285 | ||
3286 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SRANDOM_R> symbol, | |
3287 | which indicates to the C program that the srandom_r() | |
3288 | routine is available. | |
3289 | ||
3290 | =item C<d_sresgproto> | |
3291 | ||
3292 | From F<d_sresgproto.U>: | |
3293 | ||
3294 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRESGID_PROTO> symbol, | |
3295 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides | |
3296 | a prototype for the setresgid() function. Otherwise, it is | |
3297 | up to the program to supply one. | |
3298 | ||
3299 | =item C<d_sresuproto> | |
3300 | ||
3301 | From F<d_sresuproto.U>: | |
3302 | ||
3303 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRESUID_PROTO> symbol, | |
3304 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides | |
3305 | a prototype for the setresuid() function. Otherwise, it is | |
3306 | up to the program to supply one. | |
3307 | ||
3308 | =item C<d_statblks> | |
3309 | ||
3310 | From F<d_statblks.U>: | |
3311 | ||
3312 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_STAT_BLOCKS> | |
3313 | if this system has a stat structure declaring | |
3314 | st_blksize and st_blocks. | |
3315 | ||
3316 | =item C<d_statfs_f_flags> | |
3317 | ||
3318 | From F<d_statfs_f_flags.U>: | |
3319 | ||
3320 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_STATFS_F_FLAGS> | |
3321 | symbol, which indicates to struct statfs from has f_flags member. | |
3322 | This kind of struct statfs is coming from F<sys/mount.h> (C<BSD>), | |
3323 | not from F<sys/statfs.h> (C<SYSV>). | |
3324 | ||
3325 | =item C<d_statfs_s> | |
3326 | ||
3327 | From F<d_statfs_s.U>: | |
3328 | ||
3329 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_STATFS> symbol, | |
3330 | which indicates that the struct statfs is supported. | |
3331 | ||
3332 | =item C<d_statvfs> | |
3333 | ||
3334 | From F<d_statvfs.U>: | |
3335 | ||
3336 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STATVFS> symbol, which | |
3337 | indicates to the C program that the statvfs() routine is available. | |
3338 | ||
3339 | =item C<d_stdio_cnt_lval> | |
3340 | ||
3341 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: | |
3342 | ||
3343 | This variable conditionally defines C<STDIO_CNT_LVALUE> if the | |
3344 | C<FILE_cnt> macro can be used as an lvalue. | |
3345 | ||
3346 | =item C<d_stdio_ptr_lval> | |
3347 | ||
3348 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: | |
3349 | ||
3350 | This variable conditionally defines C<STDIO_PTR_LVALUE> if the | |
3351 | C<FILE_ptr> macro can be used as an lvalue. | |
3352 | ||
3353 | =item C<d_stdio_ptr_lval_nochange_cnt> | |
3354 | ||
3355 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: | |
3356 | ||
3357 | This symbol is defined if using the C<FILE_ptr> macro as an lvalue | |
3358 | to increase the pointer by n leaves File_cnt(fp) unchanged. | |
3359 | ||
3360 | =item C<d_stdio_ptr_lval_sets_cnt> | |
3361 | ||
3362 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: | |
3363 | ||
3364 | This symbol is defined if using the C<FILE_ptr> macro as an lvalue | |
3365 | to increase the pointer by n has the side effect of decreasing the | |
3366 | value of File_cnt(fp) by n. | |
3367 | ||
3368 | =item C<d_stdio_stream_array> | |
3369 | ||
3370 | From F<stdio_streams.U>: | |
3371 | ||
3372 | This variable tells whether there is an array holding | |
3373 | the stdio streams. | |
3374 | ||
3375 | =item C<d_stdiobase> | |
3376 | ||
3377 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: | |
3378 | ||
3379 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_STDIO_BASE> if this system | |
3380 | has a C<FILE> structure declaring a usable _base field (or equivalent) | |
3381 | in F<stdio.h>. | |
3382 | ||
3383 | =item C<d_stdstdio> | |
3384 | ||
3385 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: | |
3386 | ||
3387 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_STDIO_PTR> if this system | |
3388 | has a C<FILE> structure declaring usable _ptr and _cnt fields (or | |
3389 | equivalent) in F<stdio.h>. | |
3390 | ||
3391 | =item C<d_strchr> | |
3392 | ||
3393 | From F<d_strchr.U>: | |
3394 | ||
3395 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRCHR> if strchr() and | |
3396 | strrchr() are available for string searching. | |
3397 | ||
3398 | =item C<d_strcoll> | |
3399 | ||
3400 | From F<d_strcoll.U>: | |
3401 | ||
3402 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRCOLL> if strcoll() is | |
3403 | available to compare strings using collating information. | |
3404 | ||
3405 | =item C<d_strctcpy> | |
3406 | ||
3407 | From F<d_strctcpy.U>: | |
3408 | ||
3409 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_STRUCT_COPY> symbol, which | |
3410 | indicates to the C program that this C compiler knows how to copy | |
3411 | structures. | |
3412 | ||
3413 | =item C<d_strerrm> | |
3414 | ||
3415 | From F<d_strerror.U>: | |
3416 | ||
3417 | This variable holds what Strerrr is defined as to translate an error | |
3418 | code condition into an error message string. It could be C<strerror> | |
3419 | or a more C<complex> macro emulating strrror with sys_errlist[], or the | |
3420 | C<unknown> string when both strerror and sys_errlist are missing. | |
3421 | ||
3422 | =item C<d_strerror> | |
3423 | ||
3424 | From F<d_strerror.U>: | |
3425 | ||
3426 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRERROR> if strerror() is | |
3427 | available to translate error numbers to strings. | |
3428 | ||
3429 | =item C<d_strerror_r> | |
3430 | ||
3431 | From F<d_strerror_r.U>: | |
3432 | ||
3433 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRERROR_R> symbol, | |
3434 | which indicates to the C program that the strerror_r() | |
3435 | routine is available. | |
3436 | ||
3437 | =item C<d_strftime> | |
3438 | ||
3439 | From F<d_strftime.U>: | |
3440 | ||
3441 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRFTIME> symbol, which | |
3442 | indicates to the C program that the strftime() routine is available. | |
3443 | ||
3444 | =item C<d_strlcat> | |
3445 | ||
3446 | From F<d_strlcat.U>: | |
3447 | ||
3448 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRLCAT> symbol, which | |
3449 | indicates to the C program that the strlcat () routine is available. | |
3450 | ||
3451 | =item C<d_strlcpy> | |
3452 | ||
3453 | From F<d_strlcpy.U>: | |
3454 | ||
3455 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRLCPY> symbol, which | |
3456 | indicates to the C program that the strlcpy () routine is available. | |
3457 | ||
3458 | =item C<d_strtod> | |
3459 | ||
3460 | From F<d_strtod.U>: | |
3461 | ||
3462 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOD> symbol, which | |
3463 | indicates to the C program that the strtod() routine is available | |
3464 | to provide better numeric string conversion than atof(). | |
3465 | ||
3466 | =item C<d_strtol> | |
3467 | ||
3468 | From F<d_strtol.U>: | |
3469 | ||
3470 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOL> symbol, which | |
3471 | indicates to the C program that the strtol() routine is available | |
3472 | to provide better numeric string conversion than atoi() and friends. | |
3473 | ||
3474 | =item C<d_strtold> | |
3475 | ||
3476 | From F<d_strtold.U>: | |
3477 | ||
3478 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOLD> symbol, which | |
3479 | indicates to the C program that the strtold() routine is available. | |
3480 | ||
3481 | =item C<d_strtoll> | |
3482 | ||
3483 | From F<d_strtoll.U>: | |
3484 | ||
3485 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOLL> symbol, which | |
3486 | indicates to the C program that the strtoll() routine is available. | |
3487 | ||
3488 | =item C<d_strtoq> | |
3489 | ||
3490 | From F<d_strtoq.U>: | |
3491 | ||
3492 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOQ> symbol, which | |
3493 | indicates to the C program that the strtoq() routine is available. | |
3494 | ||
3495 | =item C<d_strtoul> | |
3496 | ||
3497 | From F<d_strtoul.U>: | |
3498 | ||
3499 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOUL> symbol, which | |
3500 | indicates to the C program that the strtoul() routine is available | |
3501 | to provide conversion of strings to unsigned long. | |
3502 | ||
3503 | =item C<d_strtoull> | |
3504 | ||
3505 | From F<d_strtoull.U>: | |
3506 | ||
3507 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOULL> symbol, which | |
3508 | indicates to the C program that the strtoull() routine is available. | |
3509 | ||
3510 | =item C<d_strtouq> | |
3511 | ||
3512 | From F<d_strtouq.U>: | |
3513 | ||
3514 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOUQ> symbol, which | |
3515 | indicates to the C program that the strtouq() routine is available. | |
3516 | ||
3517 | =item C<d_strxfrm> | |
3518 | ||
3519 | From F<d_strxfrm.U>: | |
3520 | ||
3521 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRXFRM> if strxfrm() is | |
3522 | available to transform strings. | |
3523 | ||
3524 | =item C<d_suidsafe> | |
3525 | ||
3526 | From F<d_dosuid.U>: | |
3527 | ||
3528 | This variable conditionally defines C<SETUID_SCRIPTS_ARE_SECURE_NOW> | |
3529 | if setuid scripts can be secure. This test looks in F</dev/fd/>. | |
3530 | ||
3531 | =item C<d_symlink> | |
3532 | ||
3533 | From F<d_symlink.U>: | |
3534 | ||
3535 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SYMLINK> symbol, which | |
3536 | indicates to the C program that the symlink() routine is available | |
3537 | to create symbolic links. | |
3538 | ||
3539 | =item C<d_syscall> | |
3540 | ||
3541 | From F<d_syscall.U>: | |
3542 | ||
3543 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYSCALL> if syscall() is | |
3544 | available call arbitrary system calls. | |
3545 | ||
3546 | =item C<d_syscallproto> | |
3547 | ||
3548 | From F<d_syscallproto.U>: | |
3549 | ||
3550 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SYSCALL_PROTO> symbol, | |
3551 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides | |
3552 | a prototype for the syscall() function. Otherwise, it is | |
3553 | up to the program to supply one. | |
3554 | ||
3555 | =item C<d_sysconf> | |
3556 | ||
3557 | From F<d_sysconf.U>: | |
3558 | ||
3559 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SYSCONF> symbol, which | |
3560 | indicates to the C program that the sysconf() routine is available | |
3561 | to determine system related limits and options. | |
3562 | ||
3563 | =item C<d_sysernlst> | |
3564 | ||
3565 | From F<d_strerror.U>: | |
3566 | ||
3567 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYS_ERRNOLIST> if sys_errnolist[] | |
3568 | is available to translate error numbers to the symbolic name. | |
3569 | ||
3570 | =item C<d_syserrlst> | |
3571 | ||
3572 | From F<d_strerror.U>: | |
3573 | ||
3574 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYS_ERRLIST> if sys_errlist[] is | |
3575 | available to translate error numbers to strings. | |
3576 | ||
3577 | =item C<d_system> | |
3578 | ||
3579 | From F<d_system.U>: | |
3580 | ||
3581 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYSTEM> if system() is | |
3582 | available to issue a shell command. | |
3583 | ||
3584 | =item C<d_tcgetpgrp> | |
3585 | ||
3586 | From F<d_tcgtpgrp.U>: | |
3587 | ||
3588 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TCGETPGRP> symbol, which | |
3589 | indicates to the C program that the tcgetpgrp() routine is available. | |
3590 | to get foreground process group C<ID>. | |
3591 | ||
3592 | =item C<d_tcsetpgrp> | |
3593 | ||
3594 | From F<d_tcstpgrp.U>: | |
3595 | ||
3596 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TCSETPGRP> symbol, which | |
3597 | indicates to the C program that the tcsetpgrp() routine is available | |
3598 | to set foreground process group C<ID>. | |
3599 | ||
3600 | =item C<d_telldir> | |
3601 | ||
3602 | From F<d_readdir.U>: | |
3603 | ||
3604 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TELLDIR> if telldir() is | |
3605 | available. | |
3606 | ||
3607 | =item C<d_telldirproto> | |
3608 | ||
3609 | From F<d_telldirproto.U>: | |
3610 | ||
3611 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TELLDIR_PROTO> symbol, | |
3612 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides | |
3613 | a prototype for the telldir() function. Otherwise, it is | |
3614 | up to the program to supply one. | |
3615 | ||
3616 | =item C<d_time> | |
3617 | ||
3618 | From F<d_time.U>: | |
3619 | ||
3620 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TIME> symbol, which indicates | |
3621 | that the time() routine exists. The time() routine is normaly | |
3622 | provided on C<UNIX> systems. | |
3623 | ||
3624 | =item C<d_times> | |
3625 | ||
3626 | From F<d_times.U>: | |
3627 | ||
3628 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TIMES> symbol, which indicates | |
3629 | that the times() routine exists. The times() routine is normaly | |
3630 | provided on C<UNIX> systems. You may have to include <sys/times.h>. | |
3631 | ||
3632 | =item C<d_tm_tm_gmtoff> | |
3633 | ||
3634 | From F<i_time.U>: | |
3635 | ||
3636 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TM_TM_GMTOFF>, which indicates | |
3637 | indicates to the C program that the struct tm has the tm_gmtoff field. | |
3638 | ||
3639 | =item C<d_tm_tm_zone> | |
3640 | ||
3641 | From F<i_time.U>: | |
3642 | ||
3643 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TM_TM_ZONE>, which indicates | |
3644 | indicates to the C program that the struct tm has the tm_zone field. | |
3645 | ||
3646 | =item C<d_tmpnam_r> | |
3647 | ||
3648 | From F<d_tmpnam_r.U>: | |
3649 | ||
3650 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TMPNAM_R> symbol, | |
3651 | which indicates to the C program that the tmpnam_r() | |
3652 | routine is available. | |
3653 | ||
3654 | =item C<d_truncate> | |
3655 | ||
3656 | From F<d_truncate.U>: | |
3657 | ||
3658 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TRUNCATE> if truncate() is | |
3659 | available to truncate files. | |
3660 | ||
3661 | =item C<d_ttyname_r> | |
3662 | ||
3663 | From F<d_ttyname_r.U>: | |
3664 | ||
3665 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TTYNAME_R> symbol, | |
3666 | which indicates to the C program that the ttyname_r() | |
3667 | routine is available. | |
3668 | ||
3669 | =item C<d_tzname> | |
3670 | ||
3671 | From F<d_tzname.U>: | |
3672 | ||
3673 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TZNAME> if tzname[] is | |
3674 | available to access timezone names. | |
3675 | ||
3676 | =item C<d_u32align> | |
3677 | ||
3678 | From F<d_u32align.U>: | |
3679 | ||
3680 | This variable tells whether you must access character data | |
3681 | through U32-aligned pointers. | |
3682 | ||
3683 | =item C<d_ualarm> | |
3684 | ||
3685 | From F<d_ualarm.U>: | |
3686 | ||
3687 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UALARM> symbol, which | |
3688 | indicates to the C program that the ualarm() routine is available. | |
3689 | ||
3690 | =item C<d_umask> | |
3691 | ||
3692 | From F<d_umask.U>: | |
3693 | ||
3694 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UMASK> symbol, which | |
3695 | indicates to the C program that the umask() routine is available. | |
3696 | to set and get the value of the file creation mask. | |
3697 | ||
3698 | =item C<d_uname> | |
3699 | ||
3700 | From F<d_gethname.U>: | |
3701 | ||
3702 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UNAME> symbol, which | |
3703 | indicates to the C program that the uname() routine may be | |
3704 | used to derive the host name. | |
3705 | ||
3706 | =item C<d_union_semun> | |
3707 | ||
3708 | From F<d_union_semun.U>: | |
3709 | ||
3710 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_UNION_SEMUN> if the | |
3711 | union semun is defined by including <sys/sem.h>. | |
3712 | ||
3713 | =item C<d_unordered> | |
3714 | ||
3715 | From F<d_unordered.U>: | |
3716 | ||
3717 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UNORDERED> symbol, which | |
3718 | indicates to the C program that the unordered() routine is available. | |
3719 | ||
3720 | =item C<d_unsetenv> | |
3721 | ||
3722 | From F<d_unsetenv.U>: | |
3723 | ||
3724 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UNSETENV> symbol, which | |
3725 | indicates to the C program that the unsetenv () routine is available. | |
3726 | ||
3727 | =item C<d_usleep> | |
3728 | ||
3729 | From F<d_usleep.U>: | |
3730 | ||
3731 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_USLEEP> if usleep() is | |
3732 | available to do high granularity sleeps. | |
3733 | ||
3734 | =item C<d_usleepproto> | |
3735 | ||
3736 | From F<d_usleepproto.U>: | |
3737 | ||
3738 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_USLEEP_PROTO> symbol, | |
3739 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides | |
3740 | a prototype for the usleep() function. Otherwise, it is | |
3741 | up to the program to supply one. | |
3742 | ||
3743 | =item C<d_ustat> | |
3744 | ||
3745 | From F<d_ustat.U>: | |
3746 | ||
3747 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_USTAT> if ustat() is | |
3748 | available to query file system statistics by dev_t. | |
3749 | ||
3750 | =item C<d_vendorarch> | |
3751 | ||
3752 | From F<vendorarch.U>: | |
3753 | ||
3754 | This variable conditionally defined C<PERL_VENDORARCH>. | |
3755 | ||
3756 | =item C<d_vendorbin> | |
3757 | ||
3758 | From F<vendorbin.U>: | |
3759 | ||
3760 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_VENDORBIN>. | |
3761 | ||
3762 | =item C<d_vendorlib> | |
3763 | ||
3764 | From F<vendorlib.U>: | |
3765 | ||
3766 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_VENDORLIB>. | |
3767 | ||
3768 | =item C<d_vendorscript> | |
3769 | ||
3770 | From F<vendorscript.U>: | |
3771 | ||
3772 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_VENDORSCRIPT>. | |
3773 | ||
3774 | =item C<d_vfork> | |
3775 | ||
3776 | From F<d_vfork.U>: | |
3777 | ||
3778 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_VFORK> symbol, which | |
3779 | indicates the vfork() routine is available. | |
3780 | ||
3781 | =item C<d_void_closedir> | |
3782 | ||
3783 | From F<d_closedir.U>: | |
3784 | ||
3785 | This variable conditionally defines C<VOID_CLOSEDIR> if closedir() | |
3786 | does not return a value. | |
3787 | ||
3788 | =item C<d_voidsig> | |
3789 | ||
3790 | From F<d_voidsig.U>: | |
3791 | ||
3792 | This variable conditionally defines C<VOIDSIG> if this system | |
3793 | declares "void (*signal(...))()" in F<signal.h>. The old way was to | |
3794 | declare it as "int (*signal(...))()". | |
3795 | ||
3796 | =item C<d_voidtty> | |
3797 | ||
3798 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>: | |
3799 | ||
3800 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_IOCNOTTY> to indicate that the | |
3801 | ioctl() call with C<TIOCNOTTY> should be used to void tty association. | |
3802 | Otherwise (on C<USG> probably), it is enough to close the standard file | |
3803 | decriptors and do a setpgrp(). | |
3804 | ||
3805 | =item C<d_volatile> | |
3806 | ||
3807 | From F<d_volatile.U>: | |
3808 | ||
3809 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HASVOLATILE> symbol, which | |
3810 | indicates to the C program that this C compiler knows about the | |
3811 | volatile declaration. | |
3812 | ||
3813 | =item C<d_vprintf> | |
3814 | ||
3815 | From F<d_vprintf.U>: | |
3816 | ||
3817 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_VPRINTF> symbol, which | |
3818 | indicates to the C program that the vprintf() routine is available | |
3819 | to printf with a pointer to an argument list. | |
3820 | ||
3821 | =item C<d_wait4> | |
3822 | ||
3823 | From F<d_wait4.U>: | |
3824 | ||
3825 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_WAIT4 symbol, which | |
3826 | indicates the wait4() routine is available. | |
3827 | ||
3828 | =item C<d_waitpid> | |
3829 | ||
3830 | From F<d_waitpid.U>: | |
3831 | ||
3832 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_WAITPID> if waitpid() is | |
3833 | available to wait for child process. | |
3834 | ||
3835 | =item C<d_wcstombs> | |
3836 | ||
3837 | From F<d_wcstombs.U>: | |
3838 | ||
3839 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_WCSTOMBS> symbol, which | |
3840 | indicates to the C program that the wcstombs() routine is available | |
3841 | to convert wide character strings to multibyte strings. | |
3842 | ||
3843 | =item C<d_wctomb> | |
3844 | ||
3845 | From F<d_wctomb.U>: | |
3846 | ||
3847 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_WCTOMB> symbol, which | |
3848 | indicates to the C program that the wctomb() routine is available | |
3849 | to convert a wide character to a multibyte. | |
3850 | ||
3851 | =item C<d_writev> | |
3852 | ||
3853 | From F<d_writev.U>: | |
3854 | ||
3855 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_WRITEV> symbol, which | |
3856 | indicates to the C program that the writev() routine is available. | |
3857 | ||
3858 | =item C<d_xenix> | |
3859 | ||
3860 | From F<Guess.U>: | |
3861 | ||
3862 | This variable conditionally defines the symbol C<XENIX>, which alerts | |
3863 | the C program that it runs under Xenix. | |
3864 | ||
3865 | =item C<date> | |
3866 | ||
3867 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
3868 | ||
3869 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
3870 | full pathname (if any) of the date program. After Configure runs, | |
3871 | the value is reset to a plain C<date> and is not useful. | |
3872 | ||
3873 | =item C<db_hashtype> | |
3874 | ||
3875 | From F<i_db.U>: | |
3876 | ||
3877 | This variable contains the type of the hash structure element | |
3878 | in the <db.h> header file. In older versions of C<DB>, it was | |
3879 | int, while in newer ones it is u_int32_t. | |
3880 | ||
3881 | =item C<db_prefixtype> | |
3882 | ||
3883 | From F<i_db.U>: | |
3884 | ||
3885 | This variable contains the type of the prefix structure element | |
3886 | in the <db.h> header file. In older versions of C<DB>, it was | |
3887 | int, while in newer ones it is size_t. | |
3888 | ||
3889 | =item C<db_version_major> | |
3890 | ||
3891 | From F<i_db.U>: | |
3892 | ||
3893 | This variable contains the major version number of | |
3894 | Berkeley C<DB> found in the <db.h> header file. | |
3895 | ||
3896 | =item C<db_version_minor> | |
3897 | ||
3898 | From F<i_db.U>: | |
3899 | ||
3900 | This variable contains the minor version number of | |
3901 | Berkeley C<DB> found in the <db.h> header file. | |
3902 | For C<DB> version 1 this is always 0. | |
3903 | ||
3904 | =item C<db_version_patch> | |
3905 | ||
3906 | From F<i_db.U>: | |
3907 | ||
3908 | This variable contains the patch version number of | |
3909 | Berkeley C<DB> found in the <db.h> header file. | |
3910 | For C<DB> version 1 this is always 0. | |
3911 | ||
3912 | =item C<defvoidused> | |
3913 | ||
3914 | From F<voidflags.U>: | |
3915 | ||
3916 | This variable contains the default value of the C<VOIDUSED> symbol (15). | |
3917 | ||
3918 | =item C<direntrytype> | |
3919 | ||
3920 | From F<i_dirent.U>: | |
3921 | ||
3922 | This symbol is set to C<struct direct> or C<struct dirent> depending on | |
3923 | whether dirent is available or not. You should use this pseudo type to | |
3924 | portably declare your directory entries. | |
3925 | ||
3926 | =item C<dlext> | |
3927 | ||
3928 | From F<dlext.U>: | |
3929 | ||
3930 | This variable contains the extension that is to be used for the | |
3931 | dynamically loaded modules that perl generaties. | |
3932 | ||
3933 | =item C<dlsrc> | |
3934 | ||
3935 | From F<dlsrc.U>: | |
3936 | ||
3937 | This variable contains the name of the dynamic loading file that | |
3938 | will be used with the package. | |
3939 | ||
3940 | =item C<doublesize> | |
3941 | ||
3942 | From F<doublesize.U>: | |
3943 | ||
3944 | This variable contains the value of the C<DOUBLESIZE> symbol, which | |
3945 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a double. | |
3946 | ||
3947 | =item C<drand01> | |
3948 | ||
3949 | From F<randfunc.U>: | |
3950 | ||
3951 | Indicates the macro to be used to generate normalized | |
3952 | random numbers. Uses randfunc, often divided by | |
3953 | (double) (((unsigned long) 1 << randbits)) in order to | |
3954 | normalize the result. | |
3955 | In C programs, the macro C<Drand01> is mapped to drand01. | |
3956 | ||
3957 | =item C<drand48_r_proto> | |
3958 | ||
3959 | From F<d_drand48_r.U>: | |
3960 | ||
3961 | This variable encodes the prototype of drand48_r. | |
3962 | It is zero if d_drand48_r is undef, and one of the | |
3963 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_drand48_r | |
3964 | is defined. | |
3965 | ||
3966 | =item C<dynamic_ext> | |
3967 | ||
3968 | From F<Extensions.U>: | |
3969 | ||
3970 | This variable holds a list of C<XS> extension files we want to | |
3971 | link dynamically into the package. It is used by Makefile. | |
3972 | ||
3973 | =back | |
3974 | ||
3975 | =head2 e | |
3976 | ||
3977 | =over 4 | |
3978 | ||
3979 | =item C<eagain> | |
3980 | ||
3981 | From F<nblock_io.U>: | |
3982 | ||
3983 | This variable bears the symbolic errno code set by read() when no | |
3984 | data is present on the file and non-blocking I/O was enabled (otherwise, | |
3985 | read() blocks naturally). | |
3986 | ||
3987 | =item C<ebcdic> | |
3988 | ||
3989 | From F<ebcdic.U>: | |
3990 | ||
3991 | This variable conditionally defines C<EBCDIC> if this | |
3992 | system uses C<EBCDIC> encoding. Among other things, this | |
3993 | means that the character ranges are not contiguous. | |
3994 | See F<trnl.U> | |
3995 | ||
3996 | =item C<echo> | |
3997 | ||
3998 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
3999 | ||
4000 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
4001 | full pathname (if any) of the echo program. After Configure runs, | |
4002 | the value is reset to a plain C<echo> and is not useful. | |
4003 | ||
4004 | =item C<egrep> | |
4005 | ||
4006 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
4007 | ||
4008 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
4009 | full pathname (if any) of the egrep program. After Configure runs, | |
4010 | the value is reset to a plain C<egrep> and is not useful. | |
4011 | ||
4012 | =item C<emacs> | |
4013 | ||
4014 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
4015 | ||
4016 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
4017 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
4018 | ||
4019 | =item C<endgrent_r_proto> | |
4020 | ||
4021 | From F<d_endgrent_r.U>: | |
4022 | ||
4023 | This variable encodes the prototype of endgrent_r. | |
4024 | It is zero if d_endgrent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4025 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endgrent_r | |
4026 | is defined. | |
4027 | ||
4028 | =item C<endhostent_r_proto> | |
4029 | ||
4030 | From F<d_endhostent_r.U>: | |
4031 | ||
4032 | This variable encodes the prototype of endhostent_r. | |
4033 | It is zero if d_endhostent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4034 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endhostent_r | |
4035 | is defined. | |
4036 | ||
4037 | =item C<endnetent_r_proto> | |
4038 | ||
4039 | From F<d_endnetent_r.U>: | |
4040 | ||
4041 | This variable encodes the prototype of endnetent_r. | |
4042 | It is zero if d_endnetent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4043 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endnetent_r | |
4044 | is defined. | |
4045 | ||
4046 | =item C<endprotoent_r_proto> | |
4047 | ||
4048 | From F<d_endprotoent_r.U>: | |
4049 | ||
4050 | This variable encodes the prototype of endprotoent_r. | |
4051 | It is zero if d_endprotoent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4052 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endprotoent_r | |
4053 | is defined. | |
4054 | ||
4055 | =item C<endpwent_r_proto> | |
4056 | ||
4057 | From F<d_endpwent_r.U>: | |
4058 | ||
4059 | This variable encodes the prototype of endpwent_r. | |
4060 | It is zero if d_endpwent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4061 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endpwent_r | |
4062 | is defined. | |
4063 | ||
4064 | =item C<endservent_r_proto> | |
4065 | ||
4066 | From F<d_endservent_r.U>: | |
4067 | ||
4068 | This variable encodes the prototype of endservent_r. | |
4069 | It is zero if d_endservent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4070 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endservent_r | |
4071 | is defined. | |
4072 | ||
4073 | =item C<eunicefix> | |
4074 | ||
4075 | From F<Init.U>: | |
4076 | ||
4077 | When running under Eunice this variable contains a command which will | |
4078 | convert a shell script to the proper form of text file for it to be | |
4079 | executable by the shell. On other systems it is a no-op. | |
4080 | ||
4081 | =item C<exe_ext> | |
4082 | ||
4083 | From F<Unix.U>: | |
4084 | ||
4085 | This is an old synonym for _exe. | |
4086 | ||
4087 | =item C<expr> | |
4088 | ||
4089 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
4090 | ||
4091 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
4092 | full pathname (if any) of the expr program. After Configure runs, | |
4093 | the value is reset to a plain C<expr> and is not useful. | |
4094 | ||
4095 | =item C<extensions> | |
4096 | ||
4097 | From F<Extensions.U>: | |
4098 | ||
4099 | This variable holds a list of all extension files (both C<XS> and | |
4100 | non-xs linked into the package. It is propagated to F<Config.pm> | |
4101 | and is typically used to test whether a particular extesion | |
4102 | is available. | |
4103 | ||
4104 | =item C<extras> | |
4105 | ||
4106 | From F<Extras.U>: | |
4107 | ||
4108 | This variable holds a list of extra modules to install. | |
4109 | ||
4110 | =back | |
4111 | ||
4112 | =head2 f | |
4113 | ||
4114 | =over 4 | |
4115 | ||
4116 | =item C<fflushall> | |
4117 | ||
4118 | From F<fflushall.U>: | |
4119 | ||
4120 | This symbol, if defined, tells that to flush | |
4121 | all pending stdio output one must loop through all | |
4122 | the stdio file handles stored in an array and fflush them. | |
4123 | Note that if fflushNULL is defined, fflushall will not | |
4124 | even be probed for and will be left undefined. | |
4125 | ||
4126 | =item C<fflushNULL> | |
4127 | ||
4128 | From F<fflushall.U>: | |
4129 | ||
4130 | This symbol, if defined, tells that fflush(C<NULL>) does flush | |
4131 | all pending stdio output. | |
4132 | ||
4133 | =item C<find> | |
4134 | ||
4135 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
4136 | ||
4137 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
4138 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
4139 | ||
4140 | =item C<firstmakefile> | |
4141 | ||
4142 | From F<Unix.U>: | |
4143 | ||
4144 | This variable defines the first file searched by make. On unix, | |
4145 | it is makefile (then Makefile). On case-insensitive systems, | |
4146 | it might be something else. This is only used to deal with | |
4147 | convoluted make depend tricks. | |
4148 | ||
4149 | =item C<flex> | |
4150 | ||
4151 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
4152 | ||
4153 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
4154 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
4155 | ||
4156 | =item C<fpossize> | |
4157 | ||
4158 | From F<fpossize.U>: | |
4159 | ||
4160 | This variable contains the size of a fpostype in bytes. | |
4161 | ||
4162 | =item C<fpostype> | |
4163 | ||
4164 | From F<fpostype.U>: | |
4165 | ||
4166 | This variable defines Fpos_t to be something like fpos_t, long, | |
4167 | uint, or whatever type is used to declare file positions in libc. | |
4168 | ||
4169 | =item C<freetype> | |
4170 | ||
4171 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: | |
4172 | ||
4173 | This variable contains the return type of free(). It is usually | |
4174 | void, but occasionally int. | |
4175 | ||
4176 | =item C<from> | |
4177 | ||
4178 | From F<Cross.U>: | |
4179 | ||
4180 | This variable contains the command used by Configure | |
4181 | to copy files from the target host. Useful and available | |
4182 | only during Perl build. | |
4183 | The string C<:> if not cross-compiling. | |
4184 | ||
4185 | =item C<full_ar> | |
4186 | ||
4187 | From F<Loc_ar.U>: | |
4188 | ||
4189 | This variable contains the full pathname to C<ar>, whether or | |
4190 | not the user has specified C<portability>. This is only used | |
4191 | in the F<Makefile.SH>. | |
4192 | ||
4193 | =item C<full_csh> | |
4194 | ||
4195 | From F<d_csh.U>: | |
4196 | ||
4197 | This variable contains the full pathname to C<csh>, whether or | |
4198 | not the user has specified C<portability>. This is only used | |
4199 | in the compiled C program, and we assume that all systems which | |
4200 | can share this executable will have the same full pathname to | |
4201 | F<csh.> | |
4202 | ||
4203 | =item C<full_sed> | |
4204 | ||
4205 | From F<Loc_sed.U>: | |
4206 | ||
4207 | This variable contains the full pathname to C<sed>, whether or | |
4208 | not the user has specified C<portability>. This is only used | |
4209 | in the compiled C program, and we assume that all systems which | |
4210 | can share this executable will have the same full pathname to | |
4211 | F<sed.> | |
4212 | ||
4213 | =back | |
4214 | ||
4215 | =head2 g | |
4216 | ||
4217 | =over 4 | |
4218 | ||
4219 | =item C<gccansipedantic> | |
4220 | ||
4221 | From F<gccvers.U>: | |
4222 | ||
4223 | If C<GNU> cc (gcc) is used, this variable will enable (if set) the | |
4224 | -ansi and -pedantic ccflags for building core files (through | |
4225 | cflags script). (See F<Porting/pumpkin.pod> for full description). | |
4226 | ||
4227 | =item C<gccosandvers> | |
4228 | ||
4229 | From F<gccvers.U>: | |
4230 | ||
4231 | If C<GNU> cc (gcc) is used, this variable holds the operating system | |
4232 | and version used to compile gcc. It is set to '' if not gcc, | |
4233 | or if nothing useful can be parsed as the os version. | |
4234 | ||
4235 | =item C<gccversion> | |
4236 | ||
4237 | From F<gccvers.U>: | |
4238 | ||
4239 | If C<GNU> cc (gcc) is used, this variable holds C<1> or C<2> to | |
4240 | indicate whether the compiler is version 1 or 2. This is used in | |
4241 | setting some of the default cflags. It is set to '' if not gcc. | |
4242 | ||
4243 | =item C<getgrent_r_proto> | |
4244 | ||
4245 | From F<d_getgrent_r.U>: | |
4246 | ||
4247 | This variable encodes the prototype of getgrent_r. | |
4248 | It is zero if d_getgrent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4249 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getgrent_r | |
4250 | is defined. | |
4251 | ||
4252 | =item C<getgrgid_r_proto> | |
4253 | ||
4254 | From F<d_getgrgid_r.U>: | |
4255 | ||
4256 | This variable encodes the prototype of getgrgid_r. | |
4257 | It is zero if d_getgrgid_r is undef, and one of the | |
4258 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getgrgid_r | |
4259 | is defined. | |
4260 | ||
4261 | =item C<getgrnam_r_proto> | |
4262 | ||
4263 | From F<d_getgrnam_r.U>: | |
4264 | ||
4265 | This variable encodes the prototype of getgrnam_r. | |
4266 | It is zero if d_getgrnam_r is undef, and one of the | |
4267 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getgrnam_r | |
4268 | is defined. | |
4269 | ||
4270 | =item C<gethostbyaddr_r_proto> | |
4271 | ||
4272 | From F<d_gethostbyaddr_r.U>: | |
4273 | ||
4274 | This variable encodes the prototype of gethostbyaddr_r. | |
4275 | It is zero if d_gethostbyaddr_r is undef, and one of the | |
4276 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gethostbyaddr_r | |
4277 | is defined. | |
4278 | ||
4279 | =item C<gethostbyname_r_proto> | |
4280 | ||
4281 | From F<d_gethostbyname_r.U>: | |
4282 | ||
4283 | This variable encodes the prototype of gethostbyname_r. | |
4284 | It is zero if d_gethostbyname_r is undef, and one of the | |
4285 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gethostbyname_r | |
4286 | is defined. | |
4287 | ||
4288 | =item C<gethostent_r_proto> | |
4289 | ||
4290 | From F<d_gethostent_r.U>: | |
4291 | ||
4292 | This variable encodes the prototype of gethostent_r. | |
4293 | It is zero if d_gethostent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4294 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gethostent_r | |
4295 | is defined. | |
4296 | ||
4297 | =item C<getlogin_r_proto> | |
4298 | ||
4299 | From F<d_getlogin_r.U>: | |
4300 | ||
4301 | This variable encodes the prototype of getlogin_r. | |
4302 | It is zero if d_getlogin_r is undef, and one of the | |
4303 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getlogin_r | |
4304 | is defined. | |
4305 | ||
4306 | =item C<getnetbyaddr_r_proto> | |
4307 | ||
4308 | From F<d_getnetbyaddr_r.U>: | |
4309 | ||
4310 | This variable encodes the prototype of getnetbyaddr_r. | |
4311 | It is zero if d_getnetbyaddr_r is undef, and one of the | |
4312 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getnetbyaddr_r | |
4313 | is defined. | |
4314 | ||
4315 | =item C<getnetbyname_r_proto> | |
4316 | ||
4317 | From F<d_getnetbyname_r.U>: | |
4318 | ||
4319 | This variable encodes the prototype of getnetbyname_r. | |
4320 | It is zero if d_getnetbyname_r is undef, and one of the | |
4321 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getnetbyname_r | |
4322 | is defined. | |
4323 | ||
4324 | =item C<getnetent_r_proto> | |
4325 | ||
4326 | From F<d_getnetent_r.U>: | |
4327 | ||
4328 | This variable encodes the prototype of getnetent_r. | |
4329 | It is zero if d_getnetent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4330 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getnetent_r | |
4331 | is defined. | |
4332 | ||
4333 | =item C<getprotobyname_r_proto> | |
4334 | ||
4335 | From F<d_getprotobyname_r.U>: | |
4336 | ||
4337 | This variable encodes the prototype of getprotobyname_r. | |
4338 | It is zero if d_getprotobyname_r is undef, and one of the | |
4339 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getprotobyname_r | |
4340 | is defined. | |
4341 | ||
4342 | =item C<getprotobynumber_r_proto> | |
4343 | ||
4344 | From F<d_getprotobynumber_r.U>: | |
4345 | ||
4346 | This variable encodes the prototype of getprotobynumber_r. | |
4347 | It is zero if d_getprotobynumber_r is undef, and one of the | |
4348 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getprotobynumber_r | |
4349 | is defined. | |
4350 | ||
4351 | =item C<getprotoent_r_proto> | |
4352 | ||
4353 | From F<d_getprotoent_r.U>: | |
4354 | ||
4355 | This variable encodes the prototype of getprotoent_r. | |
4356 | It is zero if d_getprotoent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4357 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getprotoent_r | |
4358 | is defined. | |
4359 | ||
4360 | =item C<getpwent_r_proto> | |
4361 | ||
4362 | From F<d_getpwent_r.U>: | |
4363 | ||
4364 | This variable encodes the prototype of getpwent_r. | |
4365 | It is zero if d_getpwent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4366 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getpwent_r | |
4367 | is defined. | |
4368 | ||
4369 | =item C<getpwnam_r_proto> | |
4370 | ||
4371 | From F<d_getpwnam_r.U>: | |
4372 | ||
4373 | This variable encodes the prototype of getpwnam_r. | |
4374 | It is zero if d_getpwnam_r is undef, and one of the | |
4375 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getpwnam_r | |
4376 | is defined. | |
4377 | ||
4378 | =item C<getpwuid_r_proto> | |
4379 | ||
4380 | From F<d_getpwuid_r.U>: | |
4381 | ||
4382 | This variable encodes the prototype of getpwuid_r. | |
4383 | It is zero if d_getpwuid_r is undef, and one of the | |
4384 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getpwuid_r | |
4385 | is defined. | |
4386 | ||
4387 | =item C<getservbyname_r_proto> | |
4388 | ||
4389 | From F<d_getservbyname_r.U>: | |
4390 | ||
4391 | This variable encodes the prototype of getservbyname_r. | |
4392 | It is zero if d_getservbyname_r is undef, and one of the | |
4393 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getservbyname_r | |
4394 | is defined. | |
4395 | ||
4396 | =item C<getservbyport_r_proto> | |
4397 | ||
4398 | From F<d_getservbyport_r.U>: | |
4399 | ||
4400 | This variable encodes the prototype of getservbyport_r. | |
4401 | It is zero if d_getservbyport_r is undef, and one of the | |
4402 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getservbyport_r | |
4403 | is defined. | |
4404 | ||
4405 | =item C<getservent_r_proto> | |
4406 | ||
4407 | From F<d_getservent_r.U>: | |
4408 | ||
4409 | This variable encodes the prototype of getservent_r. | |
4410 | It is zero if d_getservent_r is undef, and one of the | |
4411 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getservent_r | |
4412 | is defined. | |
4413 | ||
4414 | =item C<getspnam_r_proto> | |
4415 | ||
4416 | From F<d_getspnam_r.U>: | |
4417 | ||
4418 | This variable encodes the prototype of getspnam_r. | |
4419 | It is zero if d_getspnam_r is undef, and one of the | |
4420 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getspnam_r | |
4421 | is defined. | |
4422 | ||
4423 | =item C<gidformat> | |
4424 | ||
4425 | From F<gidf.U>: | |
4426 | ||
4427 | This variable contains the format string used for printing a Gid_t. | |
4428 | ||
4429 | =item C<gidsign> | |
4430 | ||
4431 | From F<gidsign.U>: | |
4432 | ||
4433 | This variable contains the signedness of a gidtype. | |
4434 | 1 for unsigned, -1 for signed. | |
4435 | ||
4436 | =item C<gidsize> | |
4437 | ||
4438 | From F<gidsize.U>: | |
4439 | ||
4440 | This variable contains the size of a gidtype in bytes. | |
4441 | ||
4442 | =item C<gidtype> | |
4443 | ||
4444 | From F<gidtype.U>: | |
4445 | ||
4446 | This variable defines Gid_t to be something like gid_t, int, | |
4447 | ushort, or whatever type is used to declare the return type | |
4448 | of getgid(). Typically, it is the type of group ids in the kernel. | |
4449 | ||
4450 | =item C<glibpth> | |
4451 | ||
4452 | From F<libpth.U>: | |
4453 | ||
4454 | This variable holds the general path (space-separated) used to | |
4455 | find libraries. It may contain directories that do not exist on | |
4456 | this platform, libpth is the cleaned-up version. | |
4457 | ||
4458 | =item C<gmake> | |
4459 | ||
4460 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
4461 | ||
4462 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
4463 | full pathname (if any) of the gmake program. After Configure runs, | |
4464 | the value is reset to a plain C<gmake> and is not useful. | |
4465 | ||
4466 | =item C<gmtime_r_proto> | |
4467 | ||
4468 | From F<d_gmtime_r.U>: | |
4469 | ||
4470 | This variable encodes the prototype of gmtime_r. | |
4471 | It is zero if d_gmtime_r is undef, and one of the | |
4472 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gmtime_r | |
4473 | is defined. | |
4474 | ||
4475 | =item C<gnulibc_version> | |
4476 | ||
4477 | From F<d_gnulibc.U>: | |
4478 | ||
4479 | This variable contains the version number of the C<GNU> C library. | |
4480 | It is usually something like F<2.2.5>. It is a plain '' if this | |
4481 | is not the C<GNU> C library, or if the version is unknown. | |
4482 | ||
4483 | =item C<grep> | |
4484 | ||
4485 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
4486 | ||
4487 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
4488 | full pathname (if any) of the grep program. After Configure runs, | |
4489 | the value is reset to a plain C<grep> and is not useful. | |
4490 | ||
4491 | =item C<groupcat> | |
4492 | ||
4493 | From F<nis.U>: | |
4494 | ||
4495 | This variable contains a command that produces the text of the | |
4496 | F</etc/group> file. This is normally "cat F</etc/group>", but can be | |
4497 | "ypcat group" when C<NIS> is used. | |
4498 | On some systems, such as os390, there may be no equivalent | |
4499 | command, in which case this variable is unset. | |
4500 | ||
4501 | =item C<groupstype> | |
4502 | ||
4503 | From F<groupstype.U>: | |
4504 | ||
4505 | This variable defines Groups_t to be something like gid_t, int, | |
4506 | ushort, or whatever type is used for the second argument to | |
4507 | getgroups() and setgroups(). Usually, this is the same as | |
4508 | gidtype (gid_t), but sometimes it isn't. | |
4509 | ||
4510 | =item C<gzip> | |
4511 | ||
4512 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
4513 | ||
4514 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
4515 | full pathname (if any) of the gzip program. After Configure runs, | |
4516 | the value is reset to a plain C<gzip> and is not useful. | |
4517 | ||
4518 | =back | |
4519 | ||
4520 | =head2 h | |
4521 | ||
4522 | =over 4 | |
4523 | ||
4524 | =item C<h_fcntl> | |
4525 | ||
4526 | From F<h_fcntl.U>: | |
4527 | ||
4528 | This is variable gets set in various places to tell i_fcntl that | |
4529 | <fcntl.h> should be included. | |
4530 | ||
4531 | =item C<h_sysfile> | |
4532 | ||
4533 | From F<h_sysfile.U>: | |
4534 | ||
4535 | This is variable gets set in various places to tell i_sys_file that | |
4536 | <sys/file.h> should be included. | |
4537 | ||
4538 | =item C<hint> | |
4539 | ||
4540 | From F<Oldconfig.U>: | |
4541 | ||
4542 | Gives the type of hints used for previous answers. May be one of | |
4543 | C<default>, C<recommended> or C<previous>. | |
4544 | ||
4545 | =item C<hostcat> | |
4546 | ||
4547 | From F<nis.U>: | |
4548 | ||
4549 | This variable contains a command that produces the text of the | |
4550 | F</etc/hosts> file. This is normally "cat F</etc/hosts>", but can be | |
4551 | "ypcat hosts" when C<NIS> is used. | |
4552 | On some systems, such as os390, there may be no equivalent | |
4553 | command, in which case this variable is unset. | |
4554 | ||
4555 | =item C<html1dir> | |
4556 | ||
4557 | From F<html1dir.U>: | |
4558 | ||
4559 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which html | |
4560 | source pages are to be put. This directory is for pages | |
4561 | that describe whole programs, not libraries or modules. It | |
4562 | is intended to correspond roughly to section 1 of the Unix | |
4563 | manuals. | |
4564 | ||
4565 | =item C<html1direxp> | |
4566 | ||
4567 | From F<html1dir.U>: | |
4568 | ||
4569 | This variable is the same as the html1dir variable, but is filename | |
4570 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. | |
4571 | ||
4572 | =item C<html3dir> | |
4573 | ||
4574 | From F<html3dir.U>: | |
4575 | ||
4576 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which html | |
4577 | source pages are to be put. This directory is for pages | |
4578 | that describe libraries or modules. It is intended to | |
4579 | correspond roughly to section 3 of the Unix manuals. | |
4580 | ||
4581 | =item C<html3direxp> | |
4582 | ||
4583 | From F<html3dir.U>: | |
4584 | ||
4585 | This variable is the same as the html3dir variable, but is filename | |
4586 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. | |
4587 | ||
4588 | =back | |
4589 | ||
4590 | =head2 i | |
4591 | ||
4592 | =over 4 | |
4593 | ||
4594 | =item C<i16size> | |
4595 | ||
4596 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
4597 | ||
4598 | This variable is the size of an I16 in bytes. | |
4599 | ||
4600 | =item C<i16type> | |
4601 | ||
4602 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
4603 | ||
4604 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I16. | |
4605 | ||
4606 | =item C<i32size> | |
4607 | ||
4608 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
4609 | ||
4610 | This variable is the size of an I32 in bytes. | |
4611 | ||
4612 | =item C<i32type> | |
4613 | ||
4614 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
4615 | ||
4616 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I32. | |
4617 | ||
4618 | =item C<i64size> | |
4619 | ||
4620 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
4621 | ||
4622 | This variable is the size of an I64 in bytes. | |
4623 | ||
4624 | =item C<i64type> | |
4625 | ||
4626 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
4627 | ||
4628 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I64. | |
4629 | ||
4630 | =item C<i8size> | |
4631 | ||
4632 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
4633 | ||
4634 | This variable is the size of an I8 in bytes. | |
4635 | ||
4636 | =item C<i8type> | |
4637 | ||
4638 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
4639 | ||
4640 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I8. | |
4641 | ||
4642 | =item C<i_arpainet> | |
4643 | ||
4644 | From F<i_arpainet.U>: | |
4645 | ||
4646 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_ARPA_INET> symbol, | |
4647 | and indicates whether a C program should include <arpa/inet.h>. | |
4648 | ||
4649 | =item C<i_bsdioctl> | |
4650 | ||
4651 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>: | |
4652 | ||
4653 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_BSDIOCTL> symbol, which | |
4654 | indicates to the C program that <sys/bsdioctl.h> exists and should | |
4655 | be included. | |
4656 | ||
4657 | =item C<i_crypt> | |
4658 | ||
4659 | From F<i_crypt.U>: | |
4660 | ||
4661 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_CRYPT> symbol, and indicates | |
4662 | whether a C program should include <crypt.h>. | |
4663 | ||
4664 | =item C<i_db> | |
4665 | ||
4666 | From F<i_db.U>: | |
4667 | ||
4668 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DB> symbol, and indicates | |
4669 | whether a C program may include Berkeley's C<DB> include file <db.h>. | |
4670 | ||
4671 | =item C<i_dbm> | |
4672 | ||
4673 | From F<i_dbm.U>: | |
4674 | ||
4675 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DBM> symbol, which | |
4676 | indicates to the C program that <dbm.h> exists and should | |
4677 | be included. | |
4678 | ||
4679 | =item C<i_dirent> | |
4680 | ||
4681 | From F<i_dirent.U>: | |
4682 | ||
4683 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_DIRENT>, which indicates | |
4684 | to the C program that it should include <dirent.h>. | |
4685 | ||
4686 | =item C<i_dld> | |
4687 | ||
4688 | From F<i_dld.U>: | |
4689 | ||
4690 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DLD> symbol, which | |
4691 | indicates to the C program that <dld.h> (C<GNU> dynamic loading) | |
4692 | exists and should be included. | |
4693 | ||
4694 | =item C<i_dlfcn> | |
4695 | ||
4696 | From F<i_dlfcn.U>: | |
4697 | ||
4698 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DLFCN> symbol, which | |
4699 | indicates to the C program that <dlfcn.h> exists and should | |
4700 | be included. | |
4701 | ||
4702 | =item C<i_fcntl> | |
4703 | ||
4704 | From F<i_fcntl.U>: | |
4705 | ||
4706 | This variable controls the value of C<I_FCNTL> (which tells | |
4707 | the C program to include <fcntl.h>). | |
4708 | ||
4709 | =item C<i_float> | |
4710 | ||
4711 | From F<i_float.U>: | |
4712 | ||
4713 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_FLOAT> symbol, and indicates | |
4714 | whether a C program may include <float.h> to get symbols like C<DBL_MAX> | |
4715 | or C<DBL_MIN>, F<i.e>. machine dependent floating point values. | |
4716 | ||
4717 | =item C<i_fp> | |
4718 | ||
4719 | From F<i_fp.U>: | |
4720 | ||
4721 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_FP> symbol, and indicates | |
4722 | whether a C program should include <fp.h>. | |
4723 | ||
4724 | =item C<i_fp_class> | |
4725 | ||
4726 | From F<i_fp_class.U>: | |
4727 | ||
4728 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_FP_CLASS> symbol, and indicates | |
4729 | whether a C program should include <fp_class.h>. | |
4730 | ||
4731 | =item C<i_gdbm> | |
4732 | ||
4733 | From F<i_gdbm.U>: | |
4734 | ||
4735 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_GDBM> symbol, which | |
4736 | indicates to the C program that <gdbm.h> exists and should | |
4737 | be included. | |
4738 | ||
4739 | =item C<i_grp> | |
4740 | ||
4741 | From F<i_grp.U>: | |
4742 | ||
4743 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_GRP> symbol, and indicates | |
4744 | whether a C program should include <grp.h>. | |
4745 | ||
4746 | =item C<i_ieeefp> | |
4747 | ||
4748 | From F<i_ieeefp.U>: | |
4749 | ||
4750 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_IEEEFP> symbol, and indicates | |
4751 | whether a C program should include <ieeefp.h>. | |
4752 | ||
4753 | =item C<i_inttypes> | |
4754 | ||
4755 | From F<i_inttypes.U>: | |
4756 | ||
4757 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_INTTYPES> symbol, | |
4758 | and indicates whether a C program should include <inttypes.h>. | |
4759 | ||
4760 | =item C<i_langinfo> | |
4761 | ||
4762 | From F<i_langinfo.U>: | |
4763 | ||
4764 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LANGINFO> symbol, | |
4765 | and indicates whether a C program should include <langinfo.h>. | |
4766 | ||
4767 | =item C<i_libutil> | |
4768 | ||
4769 | From F<i_libutil.U>: | |
4770 | ||
4771 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LIBUTIL> symbol, and indicates | |
4772 | whether a C program should include <libutil.h>. | |
4773 | ||
4774 | =item C<i_limits> | |
4775 | ||
4776 | From F<i_limits.U>: | |
4777 | ||
4778 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LIMITS> symbol, and indicates | |
4779 | whether a C program may include <limits.h> to get symbols like C<WORD_BIT> | |
4780 | and friends. | |
4781 | ||
4782 | =item C<i_locale> | |
4783 | ||
4784 | From F<i_locale.U>: | |
4785 | ||
4786 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LOCALE> symbol, | |
4787 | and indicates whether a C program should include <locale.h>. | |
4788 | ||
4789 | =item C<i_machcthr> | |
4790 | ||
4791 | From F<i_machcthr.U>: | |
4792 | ||
4793 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MACH_CTHREADS> symbol, | |
4794 | and indicates whether a C program should include <mach/cthreads.h>. | |
4795 | ||
4796 | =item C<i_malloc> | |
4797 | ||
4798 | From F<i_malloc.U>: | |
4799 | ||
4800 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MALLOC> symbol, and indicates | |
4801 | whether a C program should include <malloc.h>. | |
4802 | ||
4803 | =item C<i_math> | |
4804 | ||
4805 | From F<i_math.U>: | |
4806 | ||
4807 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MATH> symbol, and indicates | |
4808 | whether a C program may include <math.h>. | |
4809 | ||
4810 | =item C<i_memory> | |
4811 | ||
4812 | From F<i_memory.U>: | |
4813 | ||
4814 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MEMORY> symbol, and indicates | |
4815 | whether a C program should include <memory.h>. | |
4816 | ||
4817 | =item C<i_mntent> | |
4818 | ||
4819 | From F<i_mntent.U>: | |
4820 | ||
4821 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MNTENT> symbol, and indicates | |
4822 | whether a C program should include <mntent.h>. | |
4823 | ||
4824 | =item C<i_ndbm> | |
4825 | ||
4826 | From F<i_ndbm.U>: | |
4827 | ||
4828 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NDBM> symbol, which | |
4829 | indicates to the C program that <ndbm.h> exists and should | |
4830 | be included. | |
4831 | ||
4832 | =item C<i_netdb> | |
4833 | ||
4834 | From F<i_netdb.U>: | |
4835 | ||
4836 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NETDB> symbol, and indicates | |
4837 | whether a C program should include <netdb.h>. | |
4838 | ||
4839 | =item C<i_neterrno> | |
4840 | ||
4841 | From F<i_neterrno.U>: | |
4842 | ||
4843 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NET_ERRNO> symbol, which | |
4844 | indicates to the C program that <net/errno.h> exists and should | |
4845 | be included. | |
4846 | ||
4847 | =item C<i_netinettcp> | |
4848 | ||
4849 | From F<i_netinettcp.U>: | |
4850 | ||
4851 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NETINET_TCP> symbol, | |
4852 | and indicates whether a C program should include <netinet/tcp.h>. | |
4853 | ||
4854 | =item C<i_niin> | |
4855 | ||
4856 | From F<i_niin.U>: | |
4857 | ||
4858 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_NETINET_IN>, which indicates | |
4859 | to the C program that it should include <netinet/in.h>. Otherwise, | |
4860 | you may try <sys/in.h>. | |
4861 | ||
4862 | =item C<i_poll> | |
4863 | ||
4864 | From F<i_poll.U>: | |
4865 | ||
4866 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_POLL> symbol, and indicates | |
4867 | whether a C program should include <poll.h>. | |
4868 | ||
4869 | =item C<i_prot> | |
4870 | ||
4871 | From F<i_prot.U>: | |
4872 | ||
4873 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_PROT> symbol, and indicates | |
4874 | whether a C program should include <prot.h>. | |
4875 | ||
4876 | =item C<i_pthread> | |
4877 | ||
4878 | From F<i_pthread.U>: | |
4879 | ||
4880 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_PTHREAD> symbol, | |
4881 | and indicates whether a C program should include <pthread.h>. | |
4882 | ||
4883 | =item C<i_pwd> | |
4884 | ||
4885 | From F<i_pwd.U>: | |
4886 | ||
4887 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_PWD>, which indicates | |
4888 | to the C program that it should include <pwd.h>. | |
4889 | ||
4890 | =item C<i_rpcsvcdbm> | |
4891 | ||
4892 | From F<i_dbm.U>: | |
4893 | ||
4894 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_RPCSVC_DBM> symbol, which | |
4895 | indicates to the C program that <rpcsvc/dbm.h> exists and should | |
4896 | be included. Some System V systems might need this instead of <dbm.h>. | |
4897 | ||
4898 | =item C<i_sfio> | |
4899 | ||
4900 | From F<i_sfio.U>: | |
4901 | ||
4902 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SFIO> symbol, | |
4903 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sfio.h>. | |
4904 | ||
4905 | =item C<i_sgtty> | |
4906 | ||
4907 | From F<i_termio.U>: | |
4908 | ||
4909 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SGTTY> symbol, which | |
4910 | indicates to the C program that it should include <sgtty.h> rather | |
4911 | than <termio.h>. | |
4912 | ||
4913 | =item C<i_shadow> | |
4914 | ||
4915 | From F<i_shadow.U>: | |
4916 | ||
4917 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SHADOW> symbol, and indicates | |
4918 | whether a C program should include <shadow.h>. | |
4919 | ||
4920 | =item C<i_socks> | |
4921 | ||
4922 | From F<i_socks.U>: | |
4923 | ||
4924 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SOCKS> symbol, and indicates | |
4925 | whether a C program should include <socks.h>. | |
4926 | ||
4927 | =item C<i_stdarg> | |
4928 | ||
4929 | From F<i_varhdr.U>: | |
4930 | ||
4931 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STDARG> symbol, which | |
4932 | indicates to the C program that <stdarg.h> exists and should | |
4933 | be included. | |
4934 | ||
4935 | =item C<i_stddef> | |
4936 | ||
4937 | From F<i_stddef.U>: | |
4938 | ||
4939 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STDDEF> symbol, which | |
4940 | indicates to the C program that <stddef.h> exists and should | |
4941 | be included. | |
4942 | ||
4943 | =item C<i_stdlib> | |
4944 | ||
4945 | From F<i_stdlib.U>: | |
4946 | ||
4947 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STDLIB> symbol, which | |
4948 | indicates to the C program that <stdlib.h> exists and should | |
4949 | be included. | |
4950 | ||
4951 | =item C<i_string> | |
4952 | ||
4953 | From F<i_string.U>: | |
4954 | ||
4955 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STRING> symbol, which | |
4956 | indicates that <string.h> should be included rather than <strings.h>. | |
4957 | ||
4958 | =item C<i_sunmath> | |
4959 | ||
4960 | From F<i_sunmath.U>: | |
4961 | ||
4962 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SUNMATH> symbol, and indicates | |
4963 | whether a C program should include <sunmath.h>. | |
4964 | ||
4965 | =item C<i_sysaccess> | |
4966 | ||
4967 | From F<i_sysaccess.U>: | |
4968 | ||
4969 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_ACCESS> symbol, | |
4970 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/access.h>. | |
4971 | ||
4972 | =item C<i_sysdir> | |
4973 | ||
4974 | From F<i_sysdir.U>: | |
4975 | ||
4976 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_DIR> symbol, and indicates | |
4977 | whether a C program should include <sys/dir.h>. | |
4978 | ||
4979 | =item C<i_sysfile> | |
4980 | ||
4981 | From F<i_sysfile.U>: | |
4982 | ||
4983 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_FILE> symbol, and indicates | |
4984 | whether a C program should include <sys/file.h> to get C<R_OK> and friends. | |
4985 | ||
4986 | =item C<i_sysfilio> | |
4987 | ||
4988 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>: | |
4989 | ||
4990 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_FILIO> symbol, which | |
4991 | indicates to the C program that <sys/filio.h> exists and should | |
4992 | be included in preference to <sys/ioctl.h>. | |
4993 | ||
4994 | =item C<i_sysin> | |
4995 | ||
4996 | From F<i_niin.U>: | |
4997 | ||
4998 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_IN>, which indicates | |
4999 | to the C program that it should include <sys/in.h> instead of | |
5000 | <netinet/in.h>. | |
5001 | ||
5002 | =item C<i_sysioctl> | |
5003 | ||
5004 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>: | |
5005 | ||
5006 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_IOCTL> symbol, which | |
5007 | indicates to the C program that <sys/ioctl.h> exists and should | |
5008 | be included. | |
5009 | ||
5010 | =item C<i_syslog> | |
5011 | ||
5012 | From F<i_syslog.U>: | |
5013 | ||
5014 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSLOG> symbol, | |
5015 | and indicates whether a C program should include <syslog.h>. | |
5016 | ||
5017 | =item C<i_sysmman> | |
5018 | ||
5019 | From F<i_sysmman.U>: | |
5020 | ||
5021 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_MMAN> symbol, and | |
5022 | indicates whether a C program should include <sys/mman.h>. | |
5023 | ||
5024 | =item C<i_sysmode> | |
5025 | ||
5026 | From F<i_sysmode.U>: | |
5027 | ||
5028 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSMODE> symbol, | |
5029 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/mode.h>. | |
5030 | ||
5031 | =item C<i_sysmount> | |
5032 | ||
5033 | From F<i_sysmount.U>: | |
5034 | ||
5035 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSMOUNT> symbol, | |
5036 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/mount.h>. | |
5037 | ||
5038 | =item C<i_sysndir> | |
5039 | ||
5040 | From F<i_sysndir.U>: | |
5041 | ||
5042 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_NDIR> symbol, and indicates | |
5043 | whether a C program should include <sys/ndir.h>. | |
5044 | ||
5045 | =item C<i_sysparam> | |
5046 | ||
5047 | From F<i_sysparam.U>: | |
5048 | ||
5049 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_PARAM> symbol, and indicates | |
5050 | whether a C program should include <sys/param.h>. | |
5051 | ||
5052 | =item C<i_sysresrc> | |
5053 | ||
5054 | From F<i_sysresrc.U>: | |
5055 | ||
5056 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_RESOURCE> symbol, | |
5057 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/resource.h>. | |
5058 | ||
5059 | =item C<i_syssecrt> | |
5060 | ||
5061 | From F<i_syssecrt.U>: | |
5062 | ||
5063 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_SECURITY> symbol, | |
5064 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/security.h>. | |
5065 | ||
5066 | =item C<i_sysselct> | |
5067 | ||
5068 | From F<i_sysselct.U>: | |
5069 | ||
5070 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_SELECT>, which indicates | |
5071 | to the C program that it should include <sys/select.h> in order to | |
5072 | get the definition of struct timeval. | |
5073 | ||
5074 | =item C<i_syssockio> | |
5075 | ||
5076 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>: | |
5077 | ||
5078 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_SOCKIO> to indicate to the | |
5079 | C program that socket ioctl codes may be found in <sys/sockio.h> | |
5080 | instead of <sys/ioctl.h>. | |
5081 | ||
5082 | =item C<i_sysstat> | |
5083 | ||
5084 | From F<i_sysstat.U>: | |
5085 | ||
5086 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_STAT> symbol, | |
5087 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/stat.h>. | |
5088 | ||
5089 | =item C<i_sysstatfs> | |
5090 | ||
5091 | From F<i_sysstatfs.U>: | |
5092 | ||
5093 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSSTATFS> symbol, | |
5094 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/statfs.h>. | |
5095 | ||
5096 | =item C<i_sysstatvfs> | |
5097 | ||
5098 | From F<i_sysstatvfs.U>: | |
5099 | ||
5100 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSSTATVFS> symbol, | |
5101 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/statvfs.h>. | |
5102 | ||
5103 | =item C<i_systime> | |
5104 | ||
5105 | From F<i_time.U>: | |
5106 | ||
5107 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_TIME>, which indicates | |
5108 | to the C program that it should include <sys/time.h>. | |
5109 | ||
5110 | =item C<i_systimek> | |
5111 | ||
5112 | From F<i_time.U>: | |
5113 | ||
5114 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_TIME_KERNEL>, which | |
5115 | indicates to the C program that it should include <sys/time.h> | |
5116 | with C<KERNEL> defined. | |
5117 | ||
5118 | =item C<i_systimes> | |
5119 | ||
5120 | From F<i_systimes.U>: | |
5121 | ||
5122 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_TIMES> symbol, and indicates | |
5123 | whether a C program should include <sys/times.h>. | |
5124 | ||
5125 | =item C<i_systypes> | |
5126 | ||
5127 | From F<i_systypes.U>: | |
5128 | ||
5129 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_TYPES> symbol, | |
5130 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/types.h>. | |
5131 | ||
5132 | =item C<i_sysuio> | |
5133 | ||
5134 | From F<i_sysuio.U>: | |
5135 | ||
5136 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSUIO> symbol, and indicates | |
5137 | whether a C program should include <sys/uio.h>. | |
5138 | ||
5139 | =item C<i_sysun> | |
5140 | ||
5141 | From F<i_sysun.U>: | |
5142 | ||
5143 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_UN>, which indicates | |
5144 | to the C program that it should include <sys/un.h> to get C<UNIX> | |
5145 | domain socket definitions. | |
5146 | ||
5147 | =item C<i_sysutsname> | |
5148 | ||
5149 | From F<i_sysutsname.U>: | |
5150 | ||
5151 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSUTSNAME> symbol, | |
5152 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/utsname.h>. | |
5153 | ||
5154 | =item C<i_sysvfs> | |
5155 | ||
5156 | From F<i_sysvfs.U>: | |
5157 | ||
5158 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSVFS> symbol, | |
5159 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/vfs.h>. | |
5160 | ||
5161 | =item C<i_syswait> | |
5162 | ||
5163 | From F<i_syswait.U>: | |
5164 | ||
5165 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_WAIT>, which indicates | |
5166 | to the C program that it should include <sys/wait.h>. | |
5167 | ||
5168 | =item C<i_termio> | |
5169 | ||
5170 | From F<i_termio.U>: | |
5171 | ||
5172 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_TERMIO> symbol, which | |
5173 | indicates to the C program that it should include <termio.h> rather | |
5174 | than <sgtty.h>. | |
5175 | ||
5176 | =item C<i_termios> | |
5177 | ||
5178 | From F<i_termio.U>: | |
5179 | ||
5180 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_TERMIOS> symbol, which | |
5181 | indicates to the C program that the C<POSIX> <termios.h> file is | |
5182 | to be included. | |
5183 | ||
5184 | =item C<i_time> | |
5185 | ||
5186 | From F<i_time.U>: | |
5187 | ||
5188 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_TIME>, which indicates | |
5189 | to the C program that it should include <time.h>. | |
5190 | ||
5191 | =item C<i_unistd> | |
5192 | ||
5193 | From F<i_unistd.U>: | |
5194 | ||
5195 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_UNISTD> symbol, and indicates | |
5196 | whether a C program should include <unistd.h>. | |
5197 | ||
5198 | =item C<i_ustat> | |
5199 | ||
5200 | From F<i_ustat.U>: | |
5201 | ||
5202 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_USTAT> symbol, and indicates | |
5203 | whether a C program should include <ustat.h>. | |
5204 | ||
5205 | =item C<i_utime> | |
5206 | ||
5207 | From F<i_utime.U>: | |
5208 | ||
5209 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_UTIME> symbol, and indicates | |
5210 | whether a C program should include <utime.h>. | |
5211 | ||
5212 | =item C<i_values> | |
5213 | ||
5214 | From F<i_values.U>: | |
5215 | ||
5216 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_VALUES> symbol, and indicates | |
5217 | whether a C program may include <values.h> to get symbols like C<MAXLONG> | |
5218 | and friends. | |
5219 | ||
5220 | =item C<i_varargs> | |
5221 | ||
5222 | From F<i_varhdr.U>: | |
5223 | ||
5224 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_VARARGS>, which indicates | |
5225 | to the C program that it should include <varargs.h>. | |
5226 | ||
5227 | =item C<i_varhdr> | |
5228 | ||
5229 | From F<i_varhdr.U>: | |
5230 | ||
5231 | Contains the name of the header to be included to get va_dcl definition. | |
5232 | Typically one of F<varargs.h> or F<stdarg.h>. | |
5233 | ||
5234 | =item C<i_vfork> | |
5235 | ||
5236 | From F<i_vfork.U>: | |
5237 | ||
5238 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_VFORK> symbol, and indicates | |
5239 | whether a C program should include F<vfork.h>. | |
5240 | ||
5241 | =item C<ignore_versioned_solibs> | |
5242 | ||
5243 | From F<libs.U>: | |
5244 | ||
5245 | This variable should be non-empty if non-versioned shared | |
5246 | libraries (F<libfoo.so.x.y>) are to be ignored (because they | |
5247 | cannot be linked against). | |
5248 | ||
5249 | =item C<inc_version_list> | |
5250 | ||
5251 | From F<inc_version_list.U>: | |
5252 | ||
5253 | This variable specifies the list of subdirectories in over | |
5254 | which F<perl.c>:incpush() and F<lib/lib.pm> will automatically | |
5255 | search when adding directories to @C<INC>. The elements in | |
5256 | the list are separated by spaces. This is only useful | |
5257 | if you have a perl library directory tree structured like the | |
5258 | default one. See C<INSTALL> for how this works. The versioned | |
5259 | site_perl directory was introduced in 5.005, so that is the | |
5260 | lowest possible value. | |
5261 | ||
5262 | =item C<inc_version_list_init> | |
5263 | ||
5264 | From F<inc_version_list.U>: | |
5265 | ||
5266 | This variable holds the same list as inc_version_list, but | |
5267 | each item is enclosed in double quotes and separated by commas, | |
5268 | suitable for use in the C<PERL_INC_VERSION_LIST> initialization. | |
5269 | ||
5270 | =item C<incpath> | |
5271 | ||
5272 | From F<usrinc.U>: | |
5273 | ||
5274 | This variable must preceed the normal include path to get hte | |
5275 | right one, as in F<$F<incpath/usr/include>> or F<$F<incpath/usr/lib>>. | |
5276 | Value can be "" or F</bsd43> on mips. | |
5277 | ||
5278 | =item C<inews> | |
5279 | ||
5280 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5281 | ||
5282 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
5283 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
5284 | ||
5285 | =item C<installarchlib> | |
5286 | ||
5287 | From F<archlib.U>: | |
5288 | ||
5289 | This variable is really the same as archlibexp but may differ on | |
5290 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5291 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5292 | ||
5293 | =item C<installbin> | |
5294 | ||
5295 | From F<bin.U>: | |
5296 | ||
5297 | This variable is the same as binexp unless C<AFS> is running in which case | |
5298 | the user is explicitely prompted for it. This variable should always | |
5299 | be used in your makefiles for maximum portability. | |
5300 | ||
5301 | =item C<installhtml1dir> | |
5302 | ||
5303 | From F<html1dir.U>: | |
5304 | ||
5305 | This variable is really the same as html1direxp, unless you are | |
5306 | using a different installprefix. For extra portability, you | |
5307 | should only use this variable within your makefiles. | |
5308 | ||
5309 | =item C<installhtml3dir> | |
5310 | ||
5311 | From F<html3dir.U>: | |
5312 | ||
5313 | This variable is really the same as html3direxp, unless you are | |
5314 | using a different installprefix. For extra portability, you | |
5315 | should only use this variable within your makefiles. | |
5316 | ||
5317 | =item C<installman1dir> | |
5318 | ||
5319 | From F<man1dir.U>: | |
5320 | ||
5321 | This variable is really the same as man1direxp, unless you are using | |
5322 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas | |
5323 | man1direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra | |
5324 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. | |
5325 | ||
5326 | =item C<installman3dir> | |
5327 | ||
5328 | From F<man3dir.U>: | |
5329 | ||
5330 | This variable is really the same as man3direxp, unless you are using | |
5331 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas | |
5332 | man3direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra | |
5333 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. | |
5334 | ||
5335 | =item C<installprefix> | |
5336 | ||
5337 | From F<installprefix.U>: | |
5338 | ||
5339 | This variable holds the name of the directory below which | |
5340 | "make install" will install the package. For most users, this | |
5341 | is the same as prefix. However, it is useful for | |
5342 | installing the software into a different (usually temporary) | |
5343 | location after which it can be bundled up and moved somehow | |
5344 | to the final location specified by prefix. | |
5345 | ||
5346 | =item C<installprefixexp> | |
5347 | ||
5348 | From F<installprefix.U>: | |
5349 | ||
5350 | This variable holds the full absolute path of installprefix | |
5351 | with all F<~>-expansion done. | |
5352 | ||
5353 | =item C<installprivlib> | |
5354 | ||
5355 | From F<privlib.U>: | |
5356 | ||
5357 | This variable is really the same as privlibexp but may differ on | |
5358 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5359 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5360 | ||
5361 | =item C<installscript> | |
5362 | ||
5363 | From F<scriptdir.U>: | |
5364 | ||
5365 | This variable is usually the same as scriptdirexp, unless you are on | |
5366 | a system running C<AFS>, in which case they may differ slightly. You | |
5367 | should always use this variable within your makefiles for portability. | |
5368 | ||
5369 | =item C<installsitearch> | |
5370 | ||
5371 | From F<sitearch.U>: | |
5372 | ||
5373 | This variable is really the same as sitearchexp but may differ on | |
5374 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5375 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5376 | ||
5377 | =item C<installsitebin> | |
5378 | ||
5379 | From F<sitebin.U>: | |
5380 | ||
5381 | This variable is usually the same as sitebinexp, unless you are on | |
5382 | a system running C<AFS>, in which case they may differ slightly. You | |
5383 | should always use this variable within your makefiles for portability. | |
5384 | ||
5385 | =item C<installsitehtml1dir> | |
5386 | ||
5387 | From F<sitehtml1dir.U>: | |
5388 | ||
5389 | This variable is really the same as sitehtml1direxp, unless you are using | |
5390 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas | |
5391 | html1direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra | |
5392 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. | |
5393 | ||
5394 | =item C<installsitehtml3dir> | |
5395 | ||
5396 | From F<sitehtml3dir.U>: | |
5397 | ||
5398 | This variable is really the same as sitehtml3direxp, unless you are using | |
5399 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas | |
5400 | html3direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra | |
5401 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. | |
5402 | ||
5403 | =item C<installsitelib> | |
5404 | ||
5405 | From F<sitelib.U>: | |
5406 | ||
5407 | This variable is really the same as sitelibexp but may differ on | |
5408 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5409 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5410 | ||
5411 | =item C<installsiteman1dir> | |
5412 | ||
5413 | From F<siteman1dir.U>: | |
5414 | ||
5415 | This variable is really the same as siteman1direxp, unless you are using | |
5416 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas | |
5417 | man1direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra | |
5418 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. | |
5419 | ||
5420 | =item C<installsiteman3dir> | |
5421 | ||
5422 | From F<siteman3dir.U>: | |
5423 | ||
5424 | This variable is really the same as siteman3direxp, unless you are using | |
5425 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas | |
5426 | man3direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra | |
5427 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. | |
5428 | ||
5429 | =item C<installsitescript> | |
5430 | ||
5431 | From F<sitescript.U>: | |
5432 | ||
5433 | This variable is usually the same as sitescriptexp, unless you are on | |
5434 | a system running C<AFS>, in which case they may differ slightly. You | |
5435 | should always use this variable within your makefiles for portability. | |
5436 | ||
5437 | =item C<installstyle> | |
5438 | ||
5439 | From F<installstyle.U>: | |
5440 | ||
5441 | This variable describes the C<style> of the perl installation. | |
5442 | This is intended to be useful for tools that need to | |
5443 | manipulate entire perl distributions. Perl itself doesn't use | |
5444 | this to find its libraries -- the library directories are | |
5445 | stored directly in F<Config.pm>. Currently, there are only two | |
5446 | styles: C<lib> and F<lib/perl5>. The default library locations | |
5447 | (e.g. privlib, sitelib) are either F<$prefix/lib> or | |
5448 | F<$prefix/lib/perl5>. The former is useful if $prefix is a | |
5449 | directory dedicated to perl (e.g. F</opt/perl>), while the latter | |
5450 | is useful if $prefix is shared by many packages, e.g. if | |
5451 | $prefix=F</usr/local>. | |
5452 | ||
5453 | Unfortunately, while this C<style> variable is used to set | |
5454 | defaults for all three directory hierarchies (core, vendor, and | |
5455 | site), there is no guarantee that the same style is actually | |
5456 | appropriate for all those directories. For example, $prefix | |
5457 | might be F</opt/perl>, but $siteprefix might be F</usr/local>. | |
5458 | (Perhaps, in retrospect, the C<lib> style should never have been | |
5459 | supported, but it did seem like a nice idea at the time.) | |
5460 | ||
5461 | The situation is even less clear for tools such as MakeMaker | |
5462 | that can be used to install additional modules into | |
5463 | non-standard places. For example, if a user intends to install | |
5464 | a module into a private directory (perhaps by setting C<PREFIX> on | |
5465 | the F<Makefile.PL> command line), then there is no reason to | |
5466 | assume that the Configure-time $installstyle setting will be | |
5467 | relevant for that C<PREFIX>. | |
5468 | ||
5469 | This may later be extended to include other information, so | |
5470 | be careful with pattern-matching on the results. | |
5471 | ||
5472 | For compatibility with F<perl5.005> and earlier, the default | |
5473 | setting is based on whether or not $prefix contains the string | |
5474 | C<perl>. | |
5475 | ||
5476 | =item C<installusrbinperl> | |
5477 | ||
5478 | From F<instubperl.U>: | |
5479 | ||
5480 | This variable tells whether Perl should be installed also as | |
5481 | F</usr/bin/perl> in addition to | |
5482 | F<$installbin/perl> | |
5483 | ||
5484 | =item C<installvendorarch> | |
5485 | ||
5486 | From F<vendorarch.U>: | |
5487 | ||
5488 | This variable is really the same as vendorarchexp but may differ on | |
5489 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5490 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5491 | ||
5492 | =item C<installvendorbin> | |
5493 | ||
5494 | From F<vendorbin.U>: | |
5495 | ||
5496 | This variable is really the same as vendorbinexp but may differ on | |
5497 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5498 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5499 | ||
5500 | =item C<installvendorhtml1dir> | |
5501 | ||
5502 | From F<vendorhtml1dir.U>: | |
5503 | ||
5504 | This variable is really the same as vendorhtml1direxp but may differ on | |
5505 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5506 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5507 | ||
5508 | =item C<installvendorhtml3dir> | |
5509 | ||
5510 | From F<vendorhtml3dir.U>: | |
5511 | ||
5512 | This variable is really the same as vendorhtml3direxp but may differ on | |
5513 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5514 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5515 | ||
5516 | =item C<installvendorlib> | |
5517 | ||
5518 | From F<vendorlib.U>: | |
5519 | ||
5520 | This variable is really the same as vendorlibexp but may differ on | |
5521 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5522 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5523 | ||
5524 | =item C<installvendorman1dir> | |
5525 | ||
5526 | From F<vendorman1dir.U>: | |
5527 | ||
5528 | This variable is really the same as vendorman1direxp but may differ on | |
5529 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5530 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5531 | ||
5532 | =item C<installvendorman3dir> | |
5533 | ||
5534 | From F<vendorman3dir.U>: | |
5535 | ||
5536 | This variable is really the same as vendorman3direxp but may differ on | |
5537 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5538 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5539 | ||
5540 | =item C<installvendorscript> | |
5541 | ||
5542 | From F<vendorscript.U>: | |
5543 | ||
5544 | This variable is really the same as vendorscriptexp but may differ on | |
5545 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable | |
5546 | should be used in makefiles. | |
5547 | ||
5548 | =item C<intsize> | |
5549 | ||
5550 | From F<intsize.U>: | |
5551 | ||
5552 | This variable contains the value of the C<INTSIZE> symbol, which | |
5553 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in an int. | |
5554 | ||
5555 | =item C<issymlink> | |
5556 | ||
5557 | From F<issymlink.U>: | |
5558 | ||
5559 | This variable holds the test command to test for a symbolic link | |
5560 | (if they are supported). Typical values include C<test -h> and | |
5561 | C<test -L>. | |
5562 | ||
5563 | =item C<ivdformat> | |
5564 | ||
5565 | From F<perlxvf.U>: | |
5566 | ||
5567 | This variable contains the format string used for printing | |
5568 | a Perl C<IV> as a signed decimal integer. | |
5569 | ||
5570 | =item C<ivsize> | |
5571 | ||
5572 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
5573 | ||
5574 | This variable is the size of an C<IV> in bytes. | |
5575 | ||
5576 | =item C<ivtype> | |
5577 | ||
5578 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
5579 | ||
5580 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's C<IV>. | |
5581 | ||
5582 | =back | |
5583 | ||
5584 | =head2 k | |
5585 | ||
5586 | =over 4 | |
5587 | ||
5588 | =item C<known_extensions> | |
5589 | ||
5590 | From F<Extensions.U>: | |
5591 | ||
5592 | This variable holds a list of all C<XS> extensions included in | |
5593 | the package. | |
5594 | ||
5595 | =item C<ksh> | |
5596 | ||
5597 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5598 | ||
5599 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
5600 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
5601 | ||
5602 | =back | |
5603 | ||
5604 | =head2 l | |
5605 | ||
5606 | =over 4 | |
5607 | ||
5608 | =item C<ld> | |
5609 | ||
5610 | From F<dlsrc.U>: | |
5611 | ||
5612 | This variable indicates the program to be used to link | |
5613 | libraries for dynamic loading. On some systems, it is C<ld>. | |
5614 | On C<ELF> systems, it should be $cc. Mostly, we'll try to respect | |
5615 | the hint file setting. | |
5616 | ||
5617 | =item C<lddlflags> | |
5618 | ||
5619 | From F<dlsrc.U>: | |
5620 | ||
5621 | This variable contains any special flags that might need to be | |
5622 | passed to $ld to create a shared library suitable for dynamic | |
5623 | loading. It is up to the makefile to use it. For hpux, it | |
5624 | should be C<-b>. For sunos 4.1, it is empty. | |
5625 | ||
5626 | =item C<ldflags> | |
5627 | ||
5628 | From F<ccflags.U>: | |
5629 | ||
5630 | This variable contains any additional C loader flags desired by | |
5631 | the user. It is up to the Makefile to use this. | |
5632 | ||
5633 | =item C<ldflags_uselargefiles> | |
5634 | ||
5635 | From F<uselfs.U>: | |
5636 | ||
5637 | This variable contains the loader flags needed by large file builds | |
5638 | and added to ldflags by hints files. | |
5639 | ||
5640 | =item C<ldlibpthname> | |
5641 | ||
5642 | From F<libperl.U>: | |
5643 | ||
5644 | This variable holds the name of the shared library | |
5645 | search path, often C<LD_LIBRARY_PATH>. To get an empty | |
5646 | string, the hints file must set this to C<none>. | |
5647 | ||
5648 | =item C<less> | |
5649 | ||
5650 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5651 | ||
5652 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
5653 | full pathname (if any) of the less program. After Configure runs, | |
5654 | the value is reset to a plain C<less> and is not useful. | |
5655 | ||
5656 | =item C<lib_ext> | |
5657 | ||
5658 | From F<Unix.U>: | |
5659 | ||
5660 | This is an old synonym for _a. | |
5661 | ||
5662 | =item C<libc> | |
5663 | ||
5664 | From F<libc.U>: | |
5665 | ||
5666 | This variable contains the location of the C library. | |
5667 | ||
5668 | =item C<libperl> | |
5669 | ||
5670 | From F<libperl.U>: | |
5671 | ||
5672 | The perl executable is obtained by linking F<perlmain.c> with | |
5673 | libperl, any static extensions (usually just DynaLoader), | |
5674 | and any other libraries needed on this system. libperl | |
5675 | is usually F<libperl.a>, but can also be F<libperl.so.xxx> if | |
5676 | the user wishes to build a perl executable with a shared | |
5677 | library. | |
5678 | ||
5679 | =item C<libpth> | |
5680 | ||
5681 | From F<libpth.U>: | |
5682 | ||
5683 | This variable holds the general path (space-separated) used to find | |
5684 | libraries. It is intended to be used by other units. | |
5685 | ||
5686 | =item C<libs> | |
5687 | ||
5688 | From F<libs.U>: | |
5689 | ||
5690 | This variable holds the additional libraries we want to use. | |
5691 | It is up to the Makefile to deal with it. The list can be empty. | |
5692 | ||
5693 | =item C<libsdirs> | |
5694 | ||
5695 | From F<libs.U>: | |
5696 | ||
5697 | This variable holds the directory names aka dirnames of the libraries | |
5698 | we found and accepted, duplicates are removed. | |
5699 | ||
5700 | =item C<libsfiles> | |
5701 | ||
5702 | From F<libs.U>: | |
5703 | ||
5704 | This variable holds the filenames aka basenames of the libraries | |
5705 | we found and accepted. | |
5706 | ||
5707 | =item C<libsfound> | |
5708 | ||
5709 | From F<libs.U>: | |
5710 | ||
5711 | This variable holds the full pathnames of the libraries | |
5712 | we found and accepted. | |
5713 | ||
5714 | =item C<libspath> | |
5715 | ||
5716 | From F<libs.U>: | |
5717 | ||
5718 | This variable holds the directory names probed for libraries. | |
5719 | ||
5720 | =item C<libswanted> | |
5721 | ||
5722 | From F<Myinit.U>: | |
5723 | ||
5724 | This variable holds a list of all the libraries we want to | |
5725 | search. The order is chosen to pick up the c library | |
5726 | ahead of ucb or bsd libraries for SVR4. | |
5727 | ||
5728 | =item C<libswanted_uselargefiles> | |
5729 | ||
5730 | From F<uselfs.U>: | |
5731 | ||
5732 | This variable contains the libraries needed by large file builds | |
5733 | and added to ldflags by hints files. It is a space separated list | |
5734 | of the library names without the C<lib> prefix or any suffix, just | |
5735 | like F<libswanted.>. | |
5736 | ||
5737 | =item C<line> | |
5738 | ||
5739 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5740 | ||
5741 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
5742 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
5743 | ||
5744 | =item C<lint> | |
5745 | ||
5746 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5747 | ||
5748 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
5749 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
5750 | ||
5751 | =item C<lkflags> | |
5752 | ||
5753 | From F<ccflags.U>: | |
5754 | ||
5755 | This variable contains any additional C partial linker flags desired by | |
5756 | the user. It is up to the Makefile to use this. | |
5757 | ||
5758 | =item C<ln> | |
5759 | ||
5760 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5761 | ||
5762 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
5763 | full pathname (if any) of the ln program. After Configure runs, | |
5764 | the value is reset to a plain C<ln> and is not useful. | |
5765 | ||
5766 | =item C<lns> | |
5767 | ||
5768 | From F<lns.U>: | |
5769 | ||
5770 | This variable holds the name of the command to make | |
5771 | symbolic links (if they are supported). It can be used | |
5772 | in the Makefile. It is either C<ln -s> or C<ln> | |
5773 | ||
5774 | =item C<localtime_r_proto> | |
5775 | ||
5776 | From F<d_localtime_r.U>: | |
5777 | ||
5778 | This variable encodes the prototype of localtime_r. | |
5779 | It is zero if d_localtime_r is undef, and one of the | |
5780 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_localtime_r | |
5781 | is defined. | |
5782 | ||
5783 | =item C<locincpth> | |
5784 | ||
5785 | From F<ccflags.U>: | |
5786 | ||
5787 | This variable contains a list of additional directories to be | |
5788 | searched by the compiler. The appropriate C<-I> directives will | |
5789 | be added to ccflags. This is intended to simplify setting | |
5790 | local directories from the Configure command line. | |
5791 | It's not much, but it parallels the loclibpth stuff in F<libpth.U>. | |
5792 | ||
5793 | =item C<loclibpth> | |
5794 | ||
5795 | From F<libpth.U>: | |
5796 | ||
5797 | This variable holds the paths (space-separated) used to find local | |
5798 | libraries. It is prepended to libpth, and is intended to be easily | |
5799 | set from the command line. | |
5800 | ||
5801 | =item C<longdblsize> | |
5802 | ||
5803 | From F<d_longdbl.U>: | |
5804 | ||
5805 | This variable contains the value of the C<LONG_DOUBLESIZE> symbol, which | |
5806 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a long double, | |
5807 | if this system supports long doubles. | |
5808 | ||
5809 | =item C<longlongsize> | |
5810 | ||
5811 | From F<d_longlong.U>: | |
5812 | ||
5813 | This variable contains the value of the C<LONGLONGSIZE> symbol, which | |
5814 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a long long, | |
5815 | if this system supports long long. | |
5816 | ||
5817 | =item C<longsize> | |
5818 | ||
5819 | From F<intsize.U>: | |
5820 | ||
5821 | This variable contains the value of the C<LONGSIZE> symbol, which | |
5822 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a long. | |
5823 | ||
5824 | =item C<lp> | |
5825 | ||
5826 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5827 | ||
5828 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
5829 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
5830 | ||
5831 | =item C<lpr> | |
5832 | ||
5833 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5834 | ||
5835 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
5836 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
5837 | ||
5838 | =item C<ls> | |
5839 | ||
5840 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5841 | ||
5842 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
5843 | full pathname (if any) of the ls program. After Configure runs, | |
5844 | the value is reset to a plain C<ls> and is not useful. | |
5845 | ||
5846 | =item C<lseeksize> | |
5847 | ||
5848 | From F<lseektype.U>: | |
5849 | ||
5850 | This variable defines lseektype to be something like off_t, long, | |
5851 | or whatever type is used to declare lseek offset's type in the | |
5852 | kernel (which also appears to be lseek's return type). | |
5853 | ||
5854 | =item C<lseektype> | |
5855 | ||
5856 | From F<lseektype.U>: | |
5857 | ||
5858 | This variable defines lseektype to be something like off_t, long, | |
5859 | or whatever type is used to declare lseek offset's type in the | |
5860 | kernel (which also appears to be lseek's return type). | |
5861 | ||
5862 | =back | |
5863 | ||
5864 | =head2 m | |
5865 | ||
5866 | =over 4 | |
5867 | ||
5868 | =item C<mail> | |
5869 | ||
5870 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5871 | ||
5872 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
5873 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
5874 | ||
5875 | =item C<mailx> | |
5876 | ||
5877 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5878 | ||
5879 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
5880 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
5881 | ||
5882 | =item C<make> | |
5883 | ||
5884 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5885 | ||
5886 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
5887 | full pathname (if any) of the make program. After Configure runs, | |
5888 | the value is reset to a plain C<make> and is not useful. | |
5889 | ||
5890 | =item C<make_set_make> | |
5891 | ||
5892 | From F<make.U>: | |
5893 | ||
5894 | Some versions of C<make> set the variable C<MAKE>. Others do not. | |
5895 | This variable contains the string to be included in F<Makefile.SH> | |
5896 | so that C<MAKE> is set if needed, and not if not needed. | |
5897 | Possible values are: | |
5898 | ||
5899 | make_set_make=C<#> # If your make program handles this for you, | |
5900 | ||
5901 | make_set_make=C<MAKE=$make> # if it doesn't. | |
5902 | ||
5903 | This uses a comment character to distinguish a | |
5904 | C<set> value (from a previous F<config.sh> or Configure C<-D> option) | |
5905 | from an uncomputed value. | |
5906 | ||
5907 | =item C<mallocobj> | |
5908 | ||
5909 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: | |
5910 | ||
5911 | This variable contains the name of the F<malloc.o> that this package | |
5912 | generates, if that F<malloc.o> is preferred over the system malloc. | |
5913 | Otherwise the value is null. This variable is intended for generating | |
5914 | Makefiles. See mallocsrc. | |
5915 | ||
5916 | =item C<mallocsrc> | |
5917 | ||
5918 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: | |
5919 | ||
5920 | This variable contains the name of the F<malloc.c> that comes with | |
5921 | the package, if that F<malloc.c> is preferred over the system malloc. | |
5922 | Otherwise the value is null. This variable is intended for generating | |
5923 | Makefiles. | |
5924 | ||
5925 | =item C<malloctype> | |
5926 | ||
5927 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: | |
5928 | ||
5929 | This variable contains the kind of ptr returned by malloc and realloc. | |
5930 | ||
5931 | =item C<man1dir> | |
5932 | ||
5933 | From F<man1dir.U>: | |
5934 | ||
5935 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which manual | |
5936 | source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the | |
5937 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. | |
5938 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. | |
5939 | ||
5940 | =item C<man1direxp> | |
5941 | ||
5942 | From F<man1dir.U>: | |
5943 | ||
5944 | This variable is the same as the man1dir variable, but is filename | |
5945 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. | |
5946 | ||
5947 | =item C<man1ext> | |
5948 | ||
5949 | From F<man1dir.U>: | |
5950 | ||
5951 | This variable contains the extension that the manual page should | |
5952 | have: one of C<n>, C<l>, or C<1>. The Makefile must supply the F<.>. | |
5953 | See man1dir. | |
5954 | ||
5955 | =item C<man3dir> | |
5956 | ||
5957 | From F<man3dir.U>: | |
5958 | ||
5959 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which manual | |
5960 | source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the | |
5961 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. | |
5962 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. | |
5963 | ||
5964 | =item C<man3direxp> | |
5965 | ||
5966 | From F<man3dir.U>: | |
5967 | ||
5968 | This variable is the same as the man3dir variable, but is filename | |
5969 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. | |
5970 | ||
5971 | =item C<man3ext> | |
5972 | ||
5973 | From F<man3dir.U>: | |
5974 | ||
5975 | This variable contains the extension that the manual page should | |
5976 | have: one of C<n>, C<l>, or C<3>. The Makefile must supply the F<.>. | |
5977 | See man3dir. | |
5978 | ||
5979 | =back | |
5980 | ||
5981 | =head2 M | |
5982 | ||
5983 | =over 4 | |
5984 | ||
5985 | =item C<Mcc> | |
5986 | ||
5987 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
5988 | ||
5989 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
5990 | full pathname (if any) of the Mcc program. After Configure runs, | |
5991 | the value is reset to a plain C<Mcc> and is not useful. | |
5992 | ||
5993 | =item C<mips_type> | |
5994 | ||
5995 | From F<usrinc.U>: | |
5996 | ||
5997 | This variable holds the environment type for the mips system. | |
5998 | Possible values are "BSD 4.3" and "System V". | |
5999 | ||
6000 | =item C<mistrustnm> | |
6001 | ||
6002 | From F<Csym.U>: | |
6003 | ||
6004 | This variable can be used to establish a fallthrough for the cases | |
6005 | where nm fails to find a symbol. If usenm is false or usenm is true | |
6006 | and mistrustnm is false, this variable has no effect. If usenm is true | |
6007 | and mistrustnm is C<compile>, a test program will be compiled to try to | |
6008 | find any symbol that can't be located via nm lookup. If mistrustnm is | |
6009 | C<run>, the test program will be run as well as being compiled. | |
6010 | ||
6011 | =item C<mkdir> | |
6012 | ||
6013 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6014 | ||
6015 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
6016 | full pathname (if any) of the mkdir program. After Configure runs, | |
6017 | the value is reset to a plain C<mkdir> and is not useful. | |
6018 | ||
6019 | =item C<mmaptype> | |
6020 | ||
6021 | From F<d_mmap.U>: | |
6022 | ||
6023 | This symbol contains the type of pointer returned by mmap() | |
6024 | (and simultaneously the type of the first argument). | |
6025 | It can be C<void *> or C<caddr_t>. | |
6026 | ||
6027 | =item C<modetype> | |
6028 | ||
6029 | From F<modetype.U>: | |
6030 | ||
6031 | This variable defines modetype to be something like mode_t, | |
6032 | int, unsigned short, or whatever type is used to declare file | |
6033 | modes for system calls. | |
6034 | ||
6035 | =item C<more> | |
6036 | ||
6037 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6038 | ||
6039 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
6040 | full pathname (if any) of the more program. After Configure runs, | |
6041 | the value is reset to a plain C<more> and is not useful. | |
6042 | ||
6043 | =item C<multiarch> | |
6044 | ||
6045 | From F<multiarch.U>: | |
6046 | ||
6047 | This variable conditionally defines the C<MULTIARCH> symbol | |
6048 | which signifies the presence of multiplatform files. | |
6049 | This is normally set by hints files. | |
6050 | ||
6051 | =item C<mv> | |
6052 | ||
6053 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6054 | ||
6055 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
6056 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
6057 | ||
6058 | =item C<myarchname> | |
6059 | ||
6060 | From F<archname.U>: | |
6061 | ||
6062 | This variable holds the architecture name computed by Configure in | |
6063 | a previous run. It is not intended to be perused by any user and | |
6064 | should never be set in a hint file. | |
6065 | ||
6066 | =item C<mydomain> | |
6067 | ||
6068 | From F<myhostname.U>: | |
6069 | ||
6070 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<MYDOMAIN> symbol, | |
6071 | which is the domain of the host the program is going to run on. | |
6072 | The domain must be appended to myhostname to form a complete host name. | |
6073 | The dot comes with mydomain, and need not be supplied by the program. | |
6074 | ||
6075 | =item C<myhostname> | |
6076 | ||
6077 | From F<myhostname.U>: | |
6078 | ||
6079 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<MYHOSTNAME> symbol, | |
6080 | which is the name of the host the program is going to run on. | |
6081 | The domain is not kept with hostname, but must be gotten from mydomain. | |
6082 | The dot comes with mydomain, and need not be supplied by the program. | |
6083 | ||
6084 | =item C<myuname> | |
6085 | ||
6086 | From F<Oldconfig.U>: | |
6087 | ||
6088 | The output of C<uname -a> if available, otherwise the hostname. On Xenix, | |
6089 | pseudo variables assignments in the output are stripped, thank you. The | |
6090 | whole thing is then lower-cased. | |
6091 | ||
6092 | =back | |
6093 | ||
6094 | =head2 n | |
6095 | ||
6096 | =over 4 | |
6097 | ||
6098 | =item C<n> | |
6099 | ||
6100 | From F<n.U>: | |
6101 | ||
6102 | This variable contains the C<-n> flag if that is what causes the echo | |
6103 | command to suppress newline. Otherwise it is null. Correct usage is | |
6104 | $echo $n "prompt for a question: $c". | |
6105 | ||
6106 | =item C<need_va_copy> | |
6107 | ||
6108 | From F<need_va_copy.U>: | |
6109 | ||
6110 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the system stores | |
6111 | the variable argument list datatype, va_list, in a format | |
6112 | that cannot be copied by simple assignment, so that some | |
6113 | other means must be used when copying is required. | |
6114 | As such systems vary in their provision (or non-provision) | |
6115 | of copying mechanisms, F<handy.h> defines a platform- | |
6116 | C<independent> macro, Perl_va_copy(src, dst), to do the job. | |
6117 | ||
6118 | =item C<netdb_hlen_type> | |
6119 | ||
6120 | From F<netdbtype.U>: | |
6121 | ||
6122 | This variable holds the type used for the 2nd argument to | |
6123 | gethostbyaddr(). Usually, this is int or size_t or unsigned. | |
6124 | This is only useful if you have gethostbyaddr(), naturally. | |
6125 | ||
6126 | =item C<netdb_host_type> | |
6127 | ||
6128 | From F<netdbtype.U>: | |
6129 | ||
6130 | This variable holds the type used for the 1st argument to | |
6131 | gethostbyaddr(). Usually, this is char * or void *, possibly | |
6132 | with or without a const prefix. | |
6133 | This is only useful if you have gethostbyaddr(), naturally. | |
6134 | ||
6135 | =item C<netdb_name_type> | |
6136 | ||
6137 | From F<netdbtype.U>: | |
6138 | ||
6139 | This variable holds the type used for the argument to | |
6140 | gethostbyname(). Usually, this is char * or const char *. | |
6141 | This is only useful if you have gethostbyname(), naturally. | |
6142 | ||
6143 | =item C<netdb_net_type> | |
6144 | ||
6145 | From F<netdbtype.U>: | |
6146 | ||
6147 | This variable holds the type used for the 1st argument to | |
6148 | getnetbyaddr(). Usually, this is int or long. | |
6149 | This is only useful if you have getnetbyaddr(), naturally. | |
6150 | ||
6151 | =item C<nm> | |
6152 | ||
6153 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6154 | ||
6155 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
6156 | full pathname (if any) of the nm program. After Configure runs, | |
6157 | the value is reset to a plain C<nm> and is not useful. | |
6158 | ||
6159 | =item C<nm_opt> | |
6160 | ||
6161 | From F<usenm.U>: | |
6162 | ||
6163 | This variable holds the options that may be necessary for nm. | |
6164 | ||
6165 | =item C<nm_so_opt> | |
6166 | ||
6167 | From F<usenm.U>: | |
6168 | ||
6169 | This variable holds the options that may be necessary for nm | |
6170 | to work on a shared library but that can not be used on an | |
6171 | archive library. Currently, this is only used by Linux, where | |
6172 | nm --dynamic is *required* to get symbols from an C<ELF> library which | |
6173 | has been stripped, but nm --dynamic is *fatal* on an archive library. | |
6174 | Maybe Linux should just always set usenm=false. | |
6175 | ||
6176 | =item C<nonxs_ext> | |
6177 | ||
6178 | From F<Extensions.U>: | |
6179 | ||
6180 | This variable holds a list of all non-xs extensions included | |
6181 | in the package. All of them will be built. | |
6182 | ||
6183 | =item C<nroff> | |
6184 | ||
6185 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6186 | ||
6187 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
6188 | full pathname (if any) of the nroff program. After Configure runs, | |
6189 | the value is reset to a plain C<nroff> and is not useful. | |
6190 | ||
6191 | =item C<nv_preserves_uv_bits> | |
6192 | ||
6193 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
6194 | ||
6195 | This variable indicates how many of bits type uvtype | |
6196 | a variable nvtype can preserve. | |
6197 | ||
6198 | =item C<nveformat> | |
6199 | ||
6200 | From F<perlxvf.U>: | |
6201 | ||
6202 | This variable contains the format string used for printing | |
6203 | a Perl C<NV> using %e-ish floating point format. | |
6204 | ||
6205 | =item C<nvEUformat> | |
6206 | ||
6207 | From F<perlxvf.U>: | |
6208 | ||
6209 | This variable contains the format string used for printing | |
6210 | a Perl C<NV> using %E-ish floating point format. | |
6211 | ||
6212 | =item C<nvfformat> | |
6213 | ||
6214 | From F<perlxvf.U>: | |
6215 | ||
6216 | This variable confains the format string used for printing | |
6217 | a Perl C<NV> using %f-ish floating point format. | |
6218 | ||
6219 | =item C<nvFUformat> | |
6220 | ||
6221 | From F<perlxvf.U>: | |
6222 | ||
6223 | This variable confains the format string used for printing | |
6224 | a Perl C<NV> using %F-ish floating point format. | |
6225 | ||
6226 | =item C<nvgformat> | |
6227 | ||
6228 | From F<perlxvf.U>: | |
6229 | ||
6230 | This variable contains the format string used for printing | |
6231 | a Perl C<NV> using %g-ish floating point format. | |
6232 | ||
6233 | =item C<nvGUformat> | |
6234 | ||
6235 | From F<perlxvf.U>: | |
6236 | ||
6237 | This variable contains the format string used for printing | |
6238 | a Perl C<NV> using %G-ish floating point format. | |
6239 | ||
6240 | =item C<nvsize> | |
6241 | ||
6242 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
6243 | ||
6244 | This variable is the size of an C<NV> in bytes. | |
6245 | ||
6246 | =item C<nvtype> | |
6247 | ||
6248 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
6249 | ||
6250 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's C<NV>. | |
6251 | ||
6252 | =back | |
6253 | ||
6254 | =head2 o | |
6255 | ||
6256 | =over 4 | |
6257 | ||
6258 | =item C<o_nonblock> | |
6259 | ||
6260 | From F<nblock_io.U>: | |
6261 | ||
6262 | This variable bears the symbol value to be used during open() or fcntl() | |
6263 | to turn on non-blocking I/O for a file descriptor. If you wish to switch | |
6264 | between blocking and non-blocking, you may try ioctl(C<FIOSNBIO>) instead, | |
6265 | but that is only supported by some devices. | |
6266 | ||
6267 | =item C<obj_ext> | |
6268 | ||
6269 | From F<Unix.U>: | |
6270 | ||
6271 | This is an old synonym for _o. | |
6272 | ||
6273 | =item C<old_pthread_create_joinable> | |
6274 | ||
6275 | From F<d_pthrattrj.U>: | |
6276 | ||
6277 | This variable defines the constant to use for creating joinable | |
6278 | (aka undetached) pthreads. Unused if F<pthread.h> defines | |
6279 | C<PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE>. If used, possible values are | |
6280 | C<PTHREAD_CREATE_UNDETACHED> and C<__UNDETACHED>. | |
6281 | ||
6282 | =item C<optimize> | |
6283 | ||
6284 | From F<ccflags.U>: | |
6285 | ||
6286 | This variable contains any F<optimizer/debugger> flag that should be used. | |
6287 | It is up to the Makefile to use it. | |
6288 | ||
6289 | =item C<orderlib> | |
6290 | ||
6291 | From F<orderlib.U>: | |
6292 | ||
6293 | This variable is C<true> if the components of libraries must be ordered | |
6294 | (with `lorder $* | tsort`) before placing them in an archive. Set to | |
6295 | C<false> if ranlib or ar can generate random libraries. | |
6296 | ||
6297 | =item C<osname> | |
6298 | ||
6299 | From F<Oldconfig.U>: | |
6300 | ||
6301 | This variable contains the operating system name (e.g. sunos, | |
6302 | solaris, hpux, etc.). It can be useful later on for setting | |
6303 | defaults. Any spaces are replaced with underscores. It is set | |
6304 | to a null string if we can't figure it out. | |
6305 | ||
6306 | =item C<osvers> | |
6307 | ||
6308 | From F<Oldconfig.U>: | |
6309 | ||
6310 | This variable contains the operating system version (e.g. | |
6311 | 4.1.3, 5.2, etc.). It is primarily used for helping select | |
6312 | an appropriate hints file, but might be useful elsewhere for | |
6313 | setting defaults. It is set to '' if we can't figure it out. | |
6314 | We try to be flexible about how much of the version number | |
6315 | to keep, e.g. if 4.1.1, 4.1.2, and 4.1.3 are essentially the | |
6316 | same for this package, hints files might just be F<os_4.0> or | |
6317 | F<os_4.1>, etc., not keeping separate files for each little release. | |
6318 | ||
6319 | =item C<otherlibdirs> | |
6320 | ||
6321 | From F<otherlibdirs.U>: | |
6322 | ||
6323 | This variable contains a colon-separated set of paths for the perl | |
6324 | binary to search for additional library files or modules. | |
6325 | These directories will be tacked to the end of @C<INC>. | |
6326 | Perl will automatically search below each path for version- | |
6327 | and architecture-specific directories. See inc_version_list | |
6328 | for more details. | |
6329 | A value of C< > means C<none> and is used to preserve this value | |
6330 | for the next run through Configure. | |
6331 | ||
6332 | =back | |
6333 | ||
6334 | =head2 p | |
6335 | ||
6336 | =over 4 | |
6337 | ||
6338 | =item C<package> | |
6339 | ||
6340 | From F<package.U>: | |
6341 | ||
6342 | This variable contains the name of the package being constructed. | |
6343 | It is primarily intended for the use of later Configure units. | |
6344 | ||
6345 | =item C<pager> | |
6346 | ||
6347 | From F<pager.U>: | |
6348 | ||
6349 | This variable contains the name of the preferred pager on the system. | |
6350 | Usual values are (the full pathnames of) more, less, pg, or cat. | |
6351 | ||
6352 | =item C<passcat> | |
6353 | ||
6354 | From F<nis.U>: | |
6355 | ||
6356 | This variable contains a command that produces the text of the | |
6357 | F</etc/passwd> file. This is normally "cat F</etc/passwd>", but can be | |
6358 | "ypcat passwd" when C<NIS> is used. | |
6359 | On some systems, such as os390, there may be no equivalent | |
6360 | command, in which case this variable is unset. | |
6361 | ||
6362 | =item C<patchlevel> | |
6363 | ||
6364 | From F<patchlevel.U>: | |
6365 | ||
6366 | The patchlevel level of this package. | |
6367 | The value of patchlevel comes from the F<patchlevel.h> file. | |
6368 | In a version number such as 5.6.1, this is the C<6>. | |
6369 | In F<patchlevel.h>, this is referred to as C<PERL_VERSION>. | |
6370 | ||
6371 | =item C<path_sep> | |
6372 | ||
6373 | From F<Unix.U>: | |
6374 | ||
6375 | This is an old synonym for p_ in F<Head.U>, the character | |
6376 | used to separate elements in the command shell search C<PATH>. | |
6377 | ||
6378 | =item C<perl5> | |
6379 | ||
6380 | From F<perl5.U>: | |
6381 | ||
6382 | This variable contains the full path (if any) to a previously | |
6383 | installed F<perl5.005> or later suitable for running the script | |
6384 | to determine inc_version_list. | |
6385 | ||
6386 | =item C<perl> | |
6387 | ||
6388 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6389 | ||
6390 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
6391 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
6392 | ||
6393 | =item C<perl_patchlevel> | |
6394 | ||
6395 | From F<patchlevel.U>: | |
6396 | ||
6397 | This is the Perl patch level, a numeric change identifier, | |
6398 | as defined by whichever source code maintenance system | |
6399 | is used to maintain the patches; currently Perforce. | |
6400 | It does not correlate with the Perl version numbers or | |
6401 | the maintenance versus development dichotomy except | |
6402 | by also being increasing. | |
6403 | ||
6404 | =back | |
6405 | ||
6406 | =head2 P | |
6407 | ||
6408 | =over 4 | |
6409 | ||
6410 | =item C<PERL_REVISION> | |
6411 | ||
6412 | From F<Oldsyms.U>: | |
6413 | ||
6414 | In a Perl version number such as 5.6.2, this is the 5. | |
6415 | This value is manually set in F<patchlevel.h> | |
6416 | ||
6417 | =item C<PERL_SUBVERSION> | |
6418 | ||
6419 | From F<Oldsyms.U>: | |
6420 | ||
6421 | In a Perl version number such as 5.6.2, this is the 2. | |
6422 | Values greater than 50 represent potentially unstable | |
6423 | development subversions. | |
6424 | This value is manually set in F<patchlevel.h> | |
6425 | ||
6426 | =item C<PERL_VERSION> | |
6427 | ||
6428 | From F<Oldsyms.U>: | |
6429 | ||
6430 | In a Perl version number such as 5.6.2, this is the 6. | |
6431 | This value is manually set in F<patchlevel.h> | |
6432 | ||
6433 | =item C<perladmin> | |
6434 | ||
6435 | From F<perladmin.U>: | |
6436 | ||
6437 | Electronic mail address of the perl5 administrator. | |
6438 | ||
6439 | =item C<perllibs> | |
6440 | ||
6441 | From F<End.U>: | |
6442 | ||
6443 | The list of libraries needed by Perl only (any libraries needed | |
6444 | by extensions only will by dropped, if using dynamic loading). | |
6445 | ||
6446 | =item C<perlpath> | |
6447 | ||
6448 | From F<perlpath.U>: | |
6449 | ||
6450 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<PERLPATH> symbol, | |
6451 | which contains the name of the perl interpreter to be used in | |
6452 | shell scripts and in the "eval C<exec>" idiom. This variable is | |
6453 | not necessarily the pathname of the file containing the perl | |
6454 | interpreter; you must append the executable extension (_exe) if | |
6455 | it is not already present. Note that Perl code that runs during | |
6456 | the Perl build process cannot reference this variable, as Perl | |
6457 | may not have been installed, or even if installed, may be a | |
6458 | different version of Perl. | |
6459 | ||
6460 | =item C<pg> | |
6461 | ||
6462 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6463 | ||
6464 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
6465 | full pathname (if any) of the pg program. After Configure runs, | |
6466 | the value is reset to a plain C<pg> and is not useful. | |
6467 | ||
6468 | =item C<phostname> | |
6469 | ||
6470 | From F<myhostname.U>: | |
6471 | ||
6472 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<PHOSTNAME> symbol, | |
6473 | which is a command that can be fed to popen() to get the host name. | |
6474 | The program should probably not presume that the domain is or isn't | |
6475 | there already. | |
6476 | ||
6477 | =item C<pidtype> | |
6478 | ||
6479 | From F<pidtype.U>: | |
6480 | ||
6481 | This variable defines C<PIDTYPE> to be something like pid_t, int, | |
6482 | ushort, or whatever type is used to declare process ids in the kernel. | |
6483 | ||
6484 | =item C<plibpth> | |
6485 | ||
6486 | From F<libpth.U>: | |
6487 | ||
6488 | Holds the private path used by Configure to find out the libraries. | |
6489 | Its value is prepend to libpth. This variable takes care of special | |
6490 | machines, like the mips. Usually, it should be empty. | |
6491 | ||
6492 | =item C<pmake> | |
6493 | ||
6494 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6495 | ||
6496 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
6497 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
6498 | ||
6499 | =item C<pr> | |
6500 | ||
6501 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6502 | ||
6503 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
6504 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
6505 | ||
6506 | =item C<prefix> | |
6507 | ||
6508 | From F<prefix.U>: | |
6509 | ||
6510 | This variable holds the name of the directory below which the | |
6511 | user will install the package. Usually, this is F</usr/local>, and | |
6512 | executables go in F</usr/local/bin>, library stuff in F</usr/local/lib>, | |
6513 | man pages in F</usr/local/man>, etc. It is only used to set defaults | |
6514 | for things in F<bin.U>, F<mansrc.U>, F<privlib.U>, or F<scriptdir.U>. | |
6515 | ||
6516 | =item C<prefixexp> | |
6517 | ||
6518 | From F<prefix.U>: | |
6519 | ||
6520 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below | |
6521 | which the user will install the package. Derived from prefix. | |
6522 | ||
6523 | =item C<privlib> | |
6524 | ||
6525 | From F<privlib.U>: | |
6526 | ||
6527 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<PRIVLIB> symbol, | |
6528 | which is the name of the private library for this package. It may | |
6529 | have a F<~> on the front. It is up to the makefile to eventually create | |
6530 | this directory while performing installation (with F<~> substitution). | |
6531 | ||
6532 | =item C<privlibexp> | |
6533 | ||
6534 | From F<privlib.U>: | |
6535 | ||
6536 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of privlib, so that you | |
6537 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. | |
6538 | ||
6539 | =item C<procselfexe> | |
6540 | ||
6541 | From F<d_procselfexe.U>: | |
6542 | ||
6543 | If d_procselfexe is defined, $procselfexe is the filename | |
6544 | of the symbolic link pointing to the absolute pathname of | |
6545 | the executing program. | |
6546 | ||
6547 | =item C<prototype> | |
6548 | ||
6549 | From F<prototype.U>: | |
6550 | ||
6551 | This variable holds the eventual value of C<CAN_PROTOTYPE>, which | |
6552 | indicates the C compiler can handle funciton prototypes. | |
6553 | ||
6554 | =item C<ptrsize> | |
6555 | ||
6556 | From F<ptrsize.U>: | |
6557 | ||
6558 | This variable contains the value of the C<PTRSIZE> symbol, which | |
6559 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a pointer. | |
6560 | ||
6561 | =back | |
6562 | ||
6563 | =head2 q | |
6564 | ||
6565 | =over 4 | |
6566 | ||
6567 | =item C<quadkind> | |
6568 | ||
6569 | From F<quadtype.U>: | |
6570 | ||
6571 | This variable, if defined, encodes the type of a quad: | |
6572 | 1 = int, 2 = long, 3 = long long, 4 = int64_t. | |
6573 | ||
6574 | =item C<quadtype> | |
6575 | ||
6576 | From F<quadtype.U>: | |
6577 | ||
6578 | This variable defines Quad_t to be something like long, int, | |
6579 | long long, int64_t, or whatever type is used for 64-bit integers. | |
6580 | ||
6581 | =back | |
6582 | ||
6583 | =head2 r | |
6584 | ||
6585 | =over 4 | |
6586 | ||
6587 | =item C<randbits> | |
6588 | ||
6589 | From F<randfunc.U>: | |
6590 | ||
6591 | Indicates how many bits are produced by the function used to | |
6592 | generate normalized random numbers. | |
6593 | ||
6594 | =item C<randfunc> | |
6595 | ||
6596 | From F<randfunc.U>: | |
6597 | ||
6598 | Indicates the name of the random number function to use. | |
6599 | Values include drand48, random, and rand. In C programs, | |
6600 | the C<Drand01> macro is defined to generate uniformly distributed | |
6601 | random numbers over the range [0., 1.[ (see drand01 and nrand). | |
6602 | ||
6603 | =item C<random_r_proto> | |
6604 | ||
6605 | From F<d_random_r.U>: | |
6606 | ||
6607 | This variable encodes the prototype of random_r. | |
6608 | It is zero if d_random_r is undef, and one of the | |
6609 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_random_r | |
6610 | is defined. | |
6611 | ||
6612 | =item C<randseedtype> | |
6613 | ||
6614 | From F<randfunc.U>: | |
6615 | ||
6616 | Indicates the type of the argument of the seedfunc. | |
6617 | ||
6618 | =item C<ranlib> | |
6619 | ||
6620 | From F<orderlib.U>: | |
6621 | ||
6622 | This variable is set to the pathname of the ranlib program, if it is | |
6623 | needed to generate random libraries. Set to C<:> if ar can generate | |
6624 | random libraries or if random libraries are not supported | |
6625 | ||
6626 | =item C<rd_nodata> | |
6627 | ||
6628 | From F<nblock_io.U>: | |
6629 | ||
6630 | This variable holds the return code from read() when no data is | |
6631 | present. It should be -1, but some systems return 0 when C<O_NDELAY> is | |
6632 | used, which is a shame because you cannot make the difference between | |
6633 | no data and an F<EOF.>. Sigh! | |
6634 | ||
6635 | =item C<readdir64_r_proto> | |
6636 | ||
6637 | From F<d_readdir64_r.U>: | |
6638 | ||
6639 | This variable encodes the prototype of readdir64_r. | |
6640 | It is zero if d_readdir64_r is undef, and one of the | |
6641 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_readdir64_r | |
6642 | is defined. | |
6643 | ||
6644 | =item C<readdir_r_proto> | |
6645 | ||
6646 | From F<d_readdir_r.U>: | |
6647 | ||
6648 | This variable encodes the prototype of readdir_r. | |
6649 | It is zero if d_readdir_r is undef, and one of the | |
6650 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_readdir_r | |
6651 | is defined. | |
6652 | ||
6653 | =item C<revision> | |
6654 | ||
6655 | From F<patchlevel.U>: | |
6656 | ||
6657 | The value of revision comes from the F<patchlevel.h> file. | |
6658 | In a version number such as 5.6.1, this is the C<5>. | |
6659 | In F<patchlevel.h>, this is referred to as C<PERL_REVISION>. | |
6660 | ||
6661 | =item C<rm> | |
6662 | ||
6663 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6664 | ||
6665 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
6666 | full pathname (if any) of the rm program. After Configure runs, | |
6667 | the value is reset to a plain C<rm> and is not useful. | |
6668 | ||
6669 | =item C<rmail> | |
6670 | ||
6671 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6672 | ||
6673 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
6674 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
6675 | ||
6676 | =item C<run> | |
6677 | ||
6678 | From F<Cross.U>: | |
6679 | ||
6680 | This variable contains the command used by Configure | |
6681 | to copy and execute a cross-compiled executable in the | |
6682 | target host. Useful and available only during Perl build. | |
6683 | Empty string '' if not cross-compiling. | |
6684 | ||
6685 | =item C<runnm> | |
6686 | ||
6687 | From F<usenm.U>: | |
6688 | ||
6689 | This variable contains C<true> or C<false> depending whether the | |
6690 | nm extraction should be performed or not, according to the value | |
6691 | of usenm and the flags on the Configure command line. | |
6692 | ||
6693 | =back | |
6694 | ||
6695 | =head2 s | |
6696 | ||
6697 | =over 4 | |
6698 | ||
6699 | =item C<sched_yield> | |
6700 | ||
6701 | From F<d_pthread_y.U>: | |
6702 | ||
6703 | This variable defines the way to yield the execution | |
6704 | of the current thread. | |
6705 | ||
6706 | =item C<scriptdir> | |
6707 | ||
6708 | From F<scriptdir.U>: | |
6709 | ||
6710 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants | |
6711 | to put publicly scripts for the package in question. It is either | |
6712 | the same directory as for binaries, or a special one that can be | |
6713 | mounted across different architectures, like F</usr/share>. Programs | |
6714 | must be prepared to deal with F<~name> expansion. | |
6715 | ||
6716 | =item C<scriptdirexp> | |
6717 | ||
6718 | From F<scriptdir.U>: | |
6719 | ||
6720 | This variable is the same as scriptdir, but is filename expanded | |
6721 | at configuration time, for programs not wanting to bother with it. | |
6722 | ||
6723 | =item C<sed> | |
6724 | ||
6725 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6726 | ||
6727 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
6728 | full pathname (if any) of the sed program. After Configure runs, | |
6729 | the value is reset to a plain C<sed> and is not useful. | |
6730 | ||
6731 | =item C<seedfunc> | |
6732 | ||
6733 | From F<randfunc.U>: | |
6734 | ||
6735 | Indicates the random number generating seed function. | |
6736 | Values include srand48, srandom, and srand. | |
6737 | ||
6738 | =item C<selectminbits> | |
6739 | ||
6740 | From F<selectminbits.U>: | |
6741 | ||
6742 | This variable holds the minimum number of bits operated by select. | |
6743 | That is, if you do select(n, ...), how many bits at least will be | |
6744 | cleared in the masks if some activity is detected. Usually this | |
6745 | is either n or 32*ceil(F<n/32>), especially many little-endians do | |
6746 | the latter. This is only useful if you have select(), naturally. | |
6747 | ||
6748 | =item C<selecttype> | |
6749 | ||
6750 | From F<selecttype.U>: | |
6751 | ||
6752 | This variable holds the type used for the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th | |
6753 | arguments to select. Usually, this is C<fd_set *>, if C<HAS_FD_SET> | |
6754 | is defined, and C<int *> otherwise. This is only useful if you | |
6755 | have select(), naturally. | |
6756 | ||
6757 | =item C<sendmail> | |
6758 | ||
6759 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6760 | ||
6761 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
6762 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
6763 | ||
6764 | =item C<setgrent_r_proto> | |
6765 | ||
6766 | From F<d_setgrent_r.U>: | |
6767 | ||
6768 | This variable encodes the prototype of setgrent_r. | |
6769 | It is zero if d_setgrent_r is undef, and one of the | |
6770 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setgrent_r | |
6771 | is defined. | |
6772 | ||
6773 | =item C<sethostent_r_proto> | |
6774 | ||
6775 | From F<d_sethostent_r.U>: | |
6776 | ||
6777 | This variable encodes the prototype of sethostent_r. | |
6778 | It is zero if d_sethostent_r is undef, and one of the | |
6779 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_sethostent_r | |
6780 | is defined. | |
6781 | ||
6782 | =item C<setlocale_r_proto> | |
6783 | ||
6784 | From F<d_setlocale_r.U>: | |
6785 | ||
6786 | This variable encodes the prototype of setlocale_r. | |
6787 | It is zero if d_setlocale_r is undef, and one of the | |
6788 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setlocale_r | |
6789 | is defined. | |
6790 | ||
6791 | =item C<setnetent_r_proto> | |
6792 | ||
6793 | From F<d_setnetent_r.U>: | |
6794 | ||
6795 | This variable encodes the prototype of setnetent_r. | |
6796 | It is zero if d_setnetent_r is undef, and one of the | |
6797 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setnetent_r | |
6798 | is defined. | |
6799 | ||
6800 | =item C<setprotoent_r_proto> | |
6801 | ||
6802 | From F<d_setprotoent_r.U>: | |
6803 | ||
6804 | This variable encodes the prototype of setprotoent_r. | |
6805 | It is zero if d_setprotoent_r is undef, and one of the | |
6806 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setprotoent_r | |
6807 | is defined. | |
6808 | ||
6809 | =item C<setpwent_r_proto> | |
6810 | ||
6811 | From F<d_setpwent_r.U>: | |
6812 | ||
6813 | This variable encodes the prototype of setpwent_r. | |
6814 | It is zero if d_setpwent_r is undef, and one of the | |
6815 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setpwent_r | |
6816 | is defined. | |
6817 | ||
6818 | =item C<setservent_r_proto> | |
6819 | ||
6820 | From F<d_setservent_r.U>: | |
6821 | ||
6822 | This variable encodes the prototype of setservent_r. | |
6823 | It is zero if d_setservent_r is undef, and one of the | |
6824 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setservent_r | |
6825 | is defined. | |
6826 | ||
6827 | =item C<sh> | |
6828 | ||
6829 | From F<sh.U>: | |
6830 | ||
6831 | This variable contains the full pathname of the shell used | |
6832 | on this system to execute Bourne shell scripts. Usually, this will be | |
6833 | F</bin/sh>, though it's possible that some systems will have F</bin/ksh>, | |
6834 | F</bin/pdksh>, F</bin/ash>, F</bin/bash>, or even something such as | |
6835 | D:F</bin/sh.exe>. | |
6836 | This unit comes before F<Options.U>, so you can't set sh with a C<-D> | |
6837 | option, though you can override this (and startsh) | |
6838 | with C<-O -Dsh=F</bin/whatever> -Dstartsh=whatever> | |
6839 | ||
6840 | =item C<shar> | |
6841 | ||
6842 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
6843 | ||
6844 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
6845 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
6846 | ||
6847 | =item C<sharpbang> | |
6848 | ||
6849 | From F<spitshell.U>: | |
6850 | ||
6851 | This variable contains the string #! if this system supports that | |
6852 | construct. | |
6853 | ||
6854 | =item C<shmattype> | |
6855 | ||
6856 | From F<d_shmat.U>: | |
6857 | ||
6858 | This symbol contains the type of pointer returned by shmat(). | |
6859 | It can be C<void *> or C<char *>. | |
6860 | ||
6861 | =item C<shortsize> | |
6862 | ||
6863 | From F<intsize.U>: | |
6864 | ||
6865 | This variable contains the value of the C<SHORTSIZE> symbol which | |
6866 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a short. | |
6867 | ||
6868 | =item C<shrpenv> | |
6869 | ||
6870 | From F<libperl.U>: | |
6871 | ||
6872 | If the user builds a shared F<libperl.so>, then we need to tell the | |
6873 | C<perl> executable where it will be able to find the installed F<libperl.so>. | |
6874 | One way to do this on some systems is to set the environment variable | |
6875 | C<LD_RUN_PATH> to the directory that will be the final location of the | |
6876 | shared F<libperl.so>. The makefile can use this with something like | |
6877 | $shrpenv $(C<CC>) -o perl F<perlmain.o> $libperl $libs | |
6878 | Typical values are | |
6879 | shrpenv="env C<LD_RUN_PATH>=F<$archlibexp/C<CORE>>" | |
6880 | or | |
6881 | shrpenv='' | |
6882 | See the main perl F<Makefile.SH> for actual working usage. | |
6883 | Alternatively, we might be able to use a command line option such | |
6884 | as -R F<$archlibexp/C<CORE>> (Solaris) or -Wl,-rpath | |
6885 | F<$archlibexp/C<CORE>> (Linux). | |
6886 | ||
6887 | =item C<shsharp> | |
6888 | ||
6889 | From F<spitshell.U>: | |
6890 | ||
6891 | This variable tells further Configure units whether your sh can | |
6892 | handle # comments. | |
6893 | ||
6894 | =item C<sig_count> | |
6895 | ||
6896 | From F<sig_name.U>: | |
6897 | ||
6898 | This variable holds a number larger than the largest valid | |
6899 | signal number. This is usually the same as the C<NSIG> macro. | |
6900 | ||
6901 | =item C<sig_name> | |
6902 | ||
6903 | From F<sig_name.U>: | |
6904 | ||
6905 | This variable holds the signal names, space separated. The leading | |
6906 | C<SIG> in signal name is removed. A C<ZERO> is prepended to the list. | |
6907 | This is currently not used, sig_name_init is used instead. | |
6908 | ||
6909 | =item C<sig_name_init> | |
6910 | ||
6911 | From F<sig_name.U>: | |
6912 | ||
6913 | This variable holds the signal names, enclosed in double quotes and | |
6914 | separated by commas, suitable for use in the C<SIG_NAME> definition | |
6915 | below. A C<ZERO> is prepended to the list, and the list is | |
6916 | terminated with a plain 0. The leading C<SIG> in signal names | |
6917 | is removed. See sig_num. | |
6918 | ||
6919 | =item C<sig_num> | |
6920 | ||
6921 | From F<sig_name.U>: | |
6922 | ||
6923 | This variable holds the signal numbers, space separated. A C<ZERO> is | |
6924 | prepended to the list (corresponding to the fake C<SIGZERO>). | |
6925 | Those numbers correspond to the value of the signal listed | |
6926 | in the same place within the sig_name list. | |
6927 | This is currently not used, sig_num_init is used instead. | |
6928 | ||
6929 | =item C<sig_num_init> | |
6930 | ||
6931 | From F<sig_name.U>: | |
6932 | ||
6933 | This variable holds the signal numbers, enclosed in double quotes and | |
6934 | separated by commas, suitable for use in the C<SIG_NUM> definition | |
6935 | below. A C<ZERO> is prepended to the list, and the list is | |
6936 | terminated with a plain 0. | |
6937 | ||
6938 | =item C<sig_size> | |
6939 | ||
6940 | From F<sig_name.U>: | |
6941 | ||
6942 | This variable contains the number of elements of the sig_name | |
6943 | and sig_num arrays. | |
6944 | ||
6945 | =item C<signal_t> | |
6946 | ||
6947 | From F<d_voidsig.U>: | |
6948 | ||
6949 | This variable holds the type of the signal handler (void or int). | |
6950 | ||
6951 | =item C<sitearch> | |
6952 | ||
6953 | From F<sitearch.U>: | |
6954 | ||
6955 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<SITEARCH> symbol, | |
6956 | which is the name of the private library for this package. It may | |
6957 | have a F<~> on the front. It is up to the makefile to eventually create | |
6958 | this directory while performing installation (with F<~> substitution). | |
6959 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
6960 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local | |
6961 | architecture-dependent modules in this directory with | |
6962 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> | |
6963 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
6964 | ||
6965 | =item C<sitearchexp> | |
6966 | ||
6967 | From F<sitearch.U>: | |
6968 | ||
6969 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of sitearch, so that you | |
6970 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. | |
6971 | ||
6972 | =item C<sitebin> | |
6973 | ||
6974 | From F<sitebin.U>: | |
6975 | ||
6976 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants | |
6977 | to put add-on publicly executable files for the package in question. It | |
6978 | is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/bin>. Programs using | |
6979 | this variable must be prepared to deal with F<~name> substitution. | |
6980 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
6981 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local | |
6982 | executables in this directory with | |
6983 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> | |
6984 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
6985 | ||
6986 | =item C<sitebinexp> | |
6987 | ||
6988 | From F<sitebin.U>: | |
6989 | ||
6990 | This is the same as the sitebin variable, but is filename expanded at | |
6991 | configuration time, for use in your makefiles. | |
6992 | ||
6993 | =item C<sitehtml1dir> | |
6994 | ||
6995 | From F<sitehtml1dir.U>: | |
6996 | ||
6997 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific | |
6998 | html source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the | |
6999 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. | |
7000 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. | |
7001 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
7002 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local | |
7003 | html pages in this directory with | |
7004 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> | |
7005 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
7006 | ||
7007 | =item C<sitehtml1direxp> | |
7008 | ||
7009 | From F<sitehtml1dir.U>: | |
7010 | ||
7011 | This variable is the same as the sitehtml1dir variable, but is filename | |
7012 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. | |
7013 | ||
7014 | =item C<sitehtml3dir> | |
7015 | ||
7016 | From F<sitehtml3dir.U>: | |
7017 | ||
7018 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific | |
7019 | library html source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the | |
7020 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. | |
7021 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. | |
7022 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
7023 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local | |
7024 | library html pages in this directory with | |
7025 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> | |
7026 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
7027 | ||
7028 | =item C<sitehtml3direxp> | |
7029 | ||
7030 | From F<sitehtml3dir.U>: | |
7031 | ||
7032 | This variable is the same as the sitehtml3dir variable, but is filename | |
7033 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. | |
7034 | ||
7035 | =item C<sitelib> | |
7036 | ||
7037 | From F<sitelib.U>: | |
7038 | ||
7039 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<SITELIB> symbol, | |
7040 | which is the name of the private library for this package. It may | |
7041 | have a F<~> on the front. It is up to the makefile to eventually create | |
7042 | this directory while performing installation (with F<~> substitution). | |
7043 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
7044 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local | |
7045 | architecture-independent modules in this directory with | |
7046 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> | |
7047 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
7048 | ||
7049 | =item C<sitelib_stem> | |
7050 | ||
7051 | From F<sitelib.U>: | |
7052 | ||
7053 | This variable is $sitelibexp with any trailing version-specific component | |
7054 | removed. The elements in inc_version_list (F<inc_version_list.U>) can | |
7055 | be tacked onto this variable to generate a list of directories to search. | |
7056 | ||
7057 | =item C<sitelibexp> | |
7058 | ||
7059 | From F<sitelib.U>: | |
7060 | ||
7061 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of sitelib, so that you | |
7062 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. | |
7063 | ||
7064 | =item C<siteman1dir> | |
7065 | ||
7066 | From F<siteman1dir.U>: | |
7067 | ||
7068 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific | |
7069 | manual source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the | |
7070 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. | |
7071 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. | |
7072 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
7073 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local | |
7074 | man1 pages in this directory with | |
7075 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> | |
7076 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
7077 | ||
7078 | =item C<siteman1direxp> | |
7079 | ||
7080 | From F<siteman1dir.U>: | |
7081 | ||
7082 | This variable is the same as the siteman1dir variable, but is filename | |
7083 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. | |
7084 | ||
7085 | =item C<siteman3dir> | |
7086 | ||
7087 | From F<siteman3dir.U>: | |
7088 | ||
7089 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific | |
7090 | library man source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the | |
7091 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. | |
7092 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. | |
7093 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
7094 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local | |
7095 | man3 pages in this directory with | |
7096 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> | |
7097 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
7098 | ||
7099 | =item C<siteman3direxp> | |
7100 | ||
7101 | From F<siteman3dir.U>: | |
7102 | ||
7103 | This variable is the same as the siteman3dir variable, but is filename | |
7104 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. | |
7105 | ||
7106 | =item C<siteprefix> | |
7107 | ||
7108 | From F<siteprefix.U>: | |
7109 | ||
7110 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below | |
7111 | which the user will install add-on packages. | |
7112 | See C<INSTALL> for usage and examples. | |
7113 | ||
7114 | =item C<siteprefixexp> | |
7115 | ||
7116 | From F<siteprefix.U>: | |
7117 | ||
7118 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below | |
7119 | which the user will install add-on packages. Derived from siteprefix. | |
7120 | ||
7121 | =item C<sitescript> | |
7122 | ||
7123 | From F<sitescript.U>: | |
7124 | ||
7125 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants | |
7126 | to put add-on publicly executable files for the package in question. It | |
7127 | is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/bin>. Programs using | |
7128 | this variable must be prepared to deal with F<~name> substitution. | |
7129 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
7130 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local | |
7131 | scripts in this directory with | |
7132 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> | |
7133 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
7134 | ||
7135 | =item C<sitescriptexp> | |
7136 | ||
7137 | From F<sitescript.U>: | |
7138 | ||
7139 | This is the same as the sitescript variable, but is filename expanded at | |
7140 | configuration time, for use in your makefiles. | |
7141 | ||
7142 | =item C<sizesize> | |
7143 | ||
7144 | From F<sizesize.U>: | |
7145 | ||
7146 | This variable contains the size of a sizetype in bytes. | |
7147 | ||
7148 | =item C<sizetype> | |
7149 | ||
7150 | From F<sizetype.U>: | |
7151 | ||
7152 | This variable defines sizetype to be something like size_t, | |
7153 | unsigned long, or whatever type is used to declare length | |
7154 | parameters for string functions. | |
7155 | ||
7156 | =item C<sleep> | |
7157 | ||
7158 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7159 | ||
7160 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
7161 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
7162 | ||
7163 | =item C<smail> | |
7164 | ||
7165 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7166 | ||
7167 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
7168 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
7169 | ||
7170 | =item C<so> | |
7171 | ||
7172 | From F<so.U>: | |
7173 | ||
7174 | This variable holds the extension used to identify shared libraries | |
7175 | (also known as shared objects) on the system. Usually set to C<so>. | |
7176 | ||
7177 | =item C<sockethdr> | |
7178 | ||
7179 | From F<d_socket.U>: | |
7180 | ||
7181 | This variable has any cpp C<-I> flags needed for socket support. | |
7182 | ||
7183 | =item C<socketlib> | |
7184 | ||
7185 | From F<d_socket.U>: | |
7186 | ||
7187 | This variable has the names of any libraries needed for socket support. | |
7188 | ||
7189 | =item C<socksizetype> | |
7190 | ||
7191 | From F<socksizetype.U>: | |
7192 | ||
7193 | This variable holds the type used for the size argument | |
7194 | for various socket calls like accept. Usual values include | |
7195 | socklen_t, size_t, and int. | |
7196 | ||
7197 | =item C<sort> | |
7198 | ||
7199 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7200 | ||
7201 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
7202 | full pathname (if any) of the sort program. After Configure runs, | |
7203 | the value is reset to a plain C<sort> and is not useful. | |
7204 | ||
7205 | =item C<spackage> | |
7206 | ||
7207 | From F<package.U>: | |
7208 | ||
7209 | This variable contains the name of the package being constructed, | |
7210 | with the first letter uppercased, F<i.e>. suitable for starting | |
7211 | sentences. | |
7212 | ||
7213 | =item C<spitshell> | |
7214 | ||
7215 | From F<spitshell.U>: | |
7216 | ||
7217 | This variable contains the command necessary to spit out a runnable | |
7218 | shell on this system. It is either cat or a grep C<-v> for # comments. | |
7219 | ||
7220 | =item C<sPRId64> | |
7221 | ||
7222 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
7223 | ||
7224 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7225 | format 64-bit decimal numbers (format C<d>) for output. | |
7226 | ||
7227 | =item C<sPRIeldbl> | |
7228 | ||
7229 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
7230 | ||
7231 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7232 | format long doubles (format C<e>) for output. | |
7233 | ||
7234 | =item C<sPRIEUldbl> | |
7235 | ||
7236 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
7237 | ||
7238 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7239 | format long doubles (format C<E>) for output. | |
7240 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIeldbl so that even | |
7241 | case-blind systems can see the difference. | |
7242 | ||
7243 | =item C<sPRIfldbl> | |
7244 | ||
7245 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
7246 | ||
7247 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7248 | format long doubles (format C<f>) for output. | |
7249 | ||
7250 | =item C<sPRIFUldbl> | |
7251 | ||
7252 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
7253 | ||
7254 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7255 | format long doubles (format C<F>) for output. | |
7256 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIfldbl so that even | |
7257 | case-blind systems can see the difference. | |
7258 | ||
7259 | =item C<sPRIgldbl> | |
7260 | ||
7261 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
7262 | ||
7263 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7264 | format long doubles (format C<g>) for output. | |
7265 | ||
7266 | =item C<sPRIGUldbl> | |
7267 | ||
7268 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
7269 | ||
7270 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7271 | format long doubles (format C<G>) for output. | |
7272 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIgldbl so that even | |
7273 | case-blind systems can see the difference. | |
7274 | ||
7275 | =item C<sPRIi64> | |
7276 | ||
7277 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
7278 | ||
7279 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7280 | format 64-bit decimal numbers (format C<i>) for output. | |
7281 | ||
7282 | =item C<sPRIo64> | |
7283 | ||
7284 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
7285 | ||
7286 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7287 | format 64-bit octal numbers (format C<o>) for output. | |
7288 | ||
7289 | =item C<sPRIu64> | |
7290 | ||
7291 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
7292 | ||
7293 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7294 | format 64-bit unsigned decimal numbers (format C<u>) for output. | |
7295 | ||
7296 | =item C<sPRIx64> | |
7297 | ||
7298 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
7299 | ||
7300 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7301 | format 64-bit hexadecimal numbers (format C<x>) for output. | |
7302 | ||
7303 | =item C<sPRIXU64> | |
7304 | ||
7305 | From F<quadfio.U>: | |
7306 | ||
7307 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7308 | format 64-bit hExADECimAl numbers (format C<X>) for output. | |
7309 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIx64 so that even | |
7310 | case-blind systems can see the difference. | |
7311 | ||
7312 | =item C<srand48_r_proto> | |
7313 | ||
7314 | From F<d_srand48_r.U>: | |
7315 | ||
7316 | This variable encodes the prototype of srand48_r. | |
7317 | It is zero if d_srand48_r is undef, and one of the | |
7318 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_srand48_r | |
7319 | is defined. | |
7320 | ||
7321 | =item C<srandom_r_proto> | |
7322 | ||
7323 | From F<d_srandom_r.U>: | |
7324 | ||
7325 | This variable encodes the prototype of srandom_r. | |
7326 | It is zero if d_srandom_r is undef, and one of the | |
7327 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_srandom_r | |
7328 | is defined. | |
7329 | ||
7330 | =item C<src> | |
7331 | ||
7332 | From F<src.U>: | |
7333 | ||
7334 | This variable holds the path to the package source. It is up to | |
7335 | the Makefile to use this variable and set C<VPATH> accordingly to | |
7336 | find the sources remotely. | |
7337 | ||
7338 | =item C<sSCNfldbl> | |
7339 | ||
7340 | From F<longdblfio.U>: | |
7341 | ||
7342 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to | |
7343 | format long doubles (format C<f>) for input. | |
7344 | ||
7345 | =item C<ssizetype> | |
7346 | ||
7347 | From F<ssizetype.U>: | |
7348 | ||
7349 | This variable defines ssizetype to be something like ssize_t, | |
7350 | long or int. It is used by functions that return a count | |
7351 | of bytes or an error condition. It must be a signed type. | |
7352 | We will pick a type such that sizeof(SSize_t) == sizeof(Size_t). | |
7353 | ||
7354 | =item C<startperl> | |
7355 | ||
7356 | From F<startperl.U>: | |
7357 | ||
7358 | This variable contains the string to put on the front of a perl | |
7359 | script to make sure (hopefully) that it runs with perl and not some | |
7360 | shell. Of course, that leading line must be followed by the classical | |
7361 | perl idiom: | |
7362 | eval 'exec perl -S $0 ${1+C<$@>}' | |
7363 | if $running_under_some_shell; | |
7364 | to guarantee perl startup should the shell execute the script. Note | |
7365 | that this magic incatation is not understood by csh. | |
7366 | ||
7367 | =item C<startsh> | |
7368 | ||
7369 | From F<startsh.U>: | |
7370 | ||
7371 | This variable contains the string to put on the front of a shell | |
7372 | script to make sure (hopefully) that it runs with sh and not some | |
7373 | other shell. | |
7374 | ||
7375 | =item C<static_ext> | |
7376 | ||
7377 | From F<Extensions.U>: | |
7378 | ||
7379 | This variable holds a list of C<XS> extension files we want to | |
7380 | link statically into the package. It is used by Makefile. | |
7381 | ||
7382 | =item C<stdchar> | |
7383 | ||
7384 | From F<stdchar.U>: | |
7385 | ||
7386 | This variable conditionally defines C<STDCHAR> to be the type of char | |
7387 | used in F<stdio.h>. It has the values "unsigned char" or C<char>. | |
7388 | ||
7389 | =item C<stdio_base> | |
7390 | ||
7391 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: | |
7392 | ||
7393 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to access the | |
7394 | _base field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will | |
7395 | be used to define the macro FILE_base(fp). | |
7396 | ||
7397 | =item C<stdio_bufsiz> | |
7398 | ||
7399 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: | |
7400 | ||
7401 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to determine | |
7402 | the number of bytes store in the I/O buffer pointer to by the | |
7403 | _base field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will | |
7404 | be used to define the macro FILE_bufsiz(fp). | |
7405 | ||
7406 | =item C<stdio_cnt> | |
7407 | ||
7408 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: | |
7409 | ||
7410 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to access the | |
7411 | _cnt field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will | |
7412 | be used to define the macro FILE_cnt(fp). | |
7413 | ||
7414 | =item C<stdio_filbuf> | |
7415 | ||
7416 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: | |
7417 | ||
7418 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to tell | |
7419 | stdio to refill its internal buffers (?). This will | |
7420 | be used to define the macro FILE_filbuf(fp). | |
7421 | ||
7422 | =item C<stdio_ptr> | |
7423 | ||
7424 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: | |
7425 | ||
7426 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to access the | |
7427 | _ptr field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will | |
7428 | be used to define the macro FILE_ptr(fp). | |
7429 | ||
7430 | =item C<stdio_stream_array> | |
7431 | ||
7432 | From F<stdio_streams.U>: | |
7433 | ||
7434 | This variable tells the name of the array holding the stdio streams. | |
7435 | Usual values include _iob, __iob, and __sF. | |
7436 | ||
7437 | =item C<strerror_r_proto> | |
7438 | ||
7439 | From F<d_strerror_r.U>: | |
7440 | ||
7441 | This variable encodes the prototype of strerror_r. | |
7442 | It is zero if d_strerror_r is undef, and one of the | |
7443 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_strerror_r | |
7444 | is defined. | |
7445 | ||
7446 | =item C<strings> | |
7447 | ||
7448 | From F<i_string.U>: | |
7449 | ||
7450 | This variable holds the full path of the string header that will be | |
7451 | used. Typically F</usr/include/string.h> or F</usr/include/strings.h>. | |
7452 | ||
7453 | =item C<submit> | |
7454 | ||
7455 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7456 | ||
7457 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
7458 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
7459 | ||
7460 | =item C<subversion> | |
7461 | ||
7462 | From F<patchlevel.U>: | |
7463 | ||
7464 | The subversion level of this package. | |
7465 | The value of subversion comes from the F<patchlevel.h> file. | |
7466 | In a version number such as 5.6.1, this is the C<1>. | |
7467 | In F<patchlevel.h>, this is referred to as C<PERL_SUBVERSION>. | |
7468 | This is unique to perl. | |
7469 | ||
7470 | =item C<sysman> | |
7471 | ||
7472 | From F<sysman.U>: | |
7473 | ||
7474 | This variable holds the place where the manual is located on this | |
7475 | system. It is not the place where the user wants to put his manual | |
7476 | pages. Rather it is the place where Configure may look to find manual | |
7477 | for unix commands (section 1 of the manual usually). See mansrc. | |
7478 | ||
7479 | =back | |
7480 | ||
7481 | =head2 t | |
7482 | ||
7483 | =over 4 | |
7484 | ||
7485 | =item C<tail> | |
7486 | ||
7487 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7488 | ||
7489 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
7490 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
7491 | ||
7492 | =item C<tar> | |
7493 | ||
7494 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7495 | ||
7496 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
7497 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
7498 | ||
7499 | =item C<targetarch> | |
7500 | ||
7501 | From F<Cross.U>: | |
7502 | ||
7503 | If cross-compiling, this variable contains the target architecture. | |
7504 | If not, this will be empty. | |
7505 | ||
7506 | =item C<tbl> | |
7507 | ||
7508 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7509 | ||
7510 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
7511 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
7512 | ||
7513 | =item C<tee> | |
7514 | ||
7515 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7516 | ||
7517 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
7518 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
7519 | ||
7520 | =item C<test> | |
7521 | ||
7522 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7523 | ||
7524 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
7525 | full pathname (if any) of the test program. After Configure runs, | |
7526 | the value is reset to a plain C<test> and is not useful. | |
7527 | ||
7528 | =item C<timeincl> | |
7529 | ||
7530 | From F<i_time.U>: | |
7531 | ||
7532 | This variable holds the full path of the included time header(s). | |
7533 | ||
7534 | =item C<timetype> | |
7535 | ||
7536 | From F<d_time.U>: | |
7537 | ||
7538 | This variable holds the type returned by time(). It can be long, | |
7539 | or time_t on C<BSD> sites (in which case <sys/types.h> should be | |
7540 | included). Anyway, the type Time_t should be used. | |
7541 | ||
7542 | =item C<tmpnam_r_proto> | |
7543 | ||
7544 | From F<d_tmpnam_r.U>: | |
7545 | ||
7546 | This variable encodes the prototype of tmpnam_r. | |
7547 | It is zero if d_tmpnam_r is undef, and one of the | |
7548 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_tmpnam_r | |
7549 | is defined. | |
7550 | ||
7551 | =item C<to> | |
7552 | ||
7553 | From F<Cross.U>: | |
7554 | ||
7555 | This variable contains the command used by Configure | |
7556 | to copy to from the target host. Useful and available | |
7557 | only during Perl build. | |
7558 | The string C<:> if not cross-compiling. | |
7559 | ||
7560 | =item C<touch> | |
7561 | ||
7562 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7563 | ||
7564 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
7565 | full pathname (if any) of the touch program. After Configure runs, | |
7566 | the value is reset to a plain C<touch> and is not useful. | |
7567 | ||
7568 | =item C<tr> | |
7569 | ||
7570 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7571 | ||
7572 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
7573 | full pathname (if any) of the tr program. After Configure runs, | |
7574 | the value is reset to a plain C<tr> and is not useful. | |
7575 | ||
7576 | =item C<trnl> | |
7577 | ||
7578 | From F<trnl.U>: | |
7579 | ||
7580 | This variable contains the value to be passed to the tr(1) | |
7581 | command to transliterate a newline. Typical values are | |
7582 | C<\012> and C<\n>. This is needed for C<EBCDIC> systems where | |
7583 | newline is not necessarily C<\012>. | |
7584 | ||
7585 | =item C<troff> | |
7586 | ||
7587 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7588 | ||
7589 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
7590 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
7591 | ||
7592 | =item C<ttyname_r_proto> | |
7593 | ||
7594 | From F<d_ttyname_r.U>: | |
7595 | ||
7596 | This variable encodes the prototype of ttyname_r. | |
7597 | It is zero if d_ttyname_r is undef, and one of the | |
7598 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_ttyname_r | |
7599 | is defined. | |
7600 | ||
7601 | =back | |
7602 | ||
7603 | =head2 u | |
7604 | ||
7605 | =over 4 | |
7606 | ||
7607 | =item C<u16size> | |
7608 | ||
7609 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
7610 | ||
7611 | This variable is the size of an U16 in bytes. | |
7612 | ||
7613 | =item C<u16type> | |
7614 | ||
7615 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
7616 | ||
7617 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U16. | |
7618 | ||
7619 | =item C<u32size> | |
7620 | ||
7621 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
7622 | ||
7623 | This variable is the size of an U32 in bytes. | |
7624 | ||
7625 | =item C<u32type> | |
7626 | ||
7627 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
7628 | ||
7629 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U32. | |
7630 | ||
7631 | =item C<u64size> | |
7632 | ||
7633 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
7634 | ||
7635 | This variable is the size of an U64 in bytes. | |
7636 | ||
7637 | =item C<u64type> | |
7638 | ||
7639 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
7640 | ||
7641 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U64. | |
7642 | ||
7643 | =item C<u8size> | |
7644 | ||
7645 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
7646 | ||
7647 | This variable is the size of an U8 in bytes. | |
7648 | ||
7649 | =item C<u8type> | |
7650 | ||
7651 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
7652 | ||
7653 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U8. | |
7654 | ||
7655 | =item C<uidformat> | |
7656 | ||
7657 | From F<uidf.U>: | |
7658 | ||
7659 | This variable contains the format string used for printing a Uid_t. | |
7660 | ||
7661 | =item C<uidsign> | |
7662 | ||
7663 | From F<uidsign.U>: | |
7664 | ||
7665 | This variable contains the signedness of a uidtype. | |
7666 | 1 for unsigned, -1 for signed. | |
7667 | ||
7668 | =item C<uidsize> | |
7669 | ||
7670 | From F<uidsize.U>: | |
7671 | ||
7672 | This variable contains the size of a uidtype in bytes. | |
7673 | ||
7674 | =item C<uidtype> | |
7675 | ||
7676 | From F<uidtype.U>: | |
7677 | ||
7678 | This variable defines Uid_t to be something like uid_t, int, | |
7679 | ushort, or whatever type is used to declare user ids in the kernel. | |
7680 | ||
7681 | =item C<uname> | |
7682 | ||
7683 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7684 | ||
7685 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
7686 | full pathname (if any) of the uname program. After Configure runs, | |
7687 | the value is reset to a plain C<uname> and is not useful. | |
7688 | ||
7689 | =item C<uniq> | |
7690 | ||
7691 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7692 | ||
7693 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
7694 | full pathname (if any) of the uniq program. After Configure runs, | |
7695 | the value is reset to a plain C<uniq> and is not useful. | |
7696 | ||
7697 | =item C<uquadtype> | |
7698 | ||
7699 | From F<quadtype.U>: | |
7700 | ||
7701 | This variable defines Uquad_t to be something like unsigned long, | |
7702 | unsigned int, unsigned long long, uint64_t, or whatever type is | |
7703 | used for 64-bit integers. | |
7704 | ||
7705 | =item C<use5005threads> | |
7706 | ||
7707 | From F<usethreads.U>: | |
7708 | ||
7709 | This variable conditionally defines the USE_5005THREADS symbol, | |
7710 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use the 5.005-based | |
7711 | threading implementation. | |
7712 | ||
7713 | =item C<use64bitall> | |
7714 | ||
7715 | From F<use64bits.U>: | |
7716 | ||
7717 | This variable conditionally defines the USE_64_BIT_ALL symbol, | |
7718 | and indicates that 64-bit integer types should be used | |
7719 | when available. The maximal possible | |
7720 | 64-bitness is employed: LP64 or ILP64, meaning that you will | |
7721 | be able to use more than 2 gigabytes of memory. This mode is | |
7722 | even more binary incompatible than USE_64_BIT_INT. You may not | |
7723 | be able to run the resulting executable in a 32-bit C<CPU> at all or | |
7724 | you may need at least to reboot your C<OS> to 64-bit mode. | |
7725 | ||
7726 | =item C<use64bitint> | |
7727 | ||
7728 | From F<use64bits.U>: | |
7729 | ||
7730 | This variable conditionally defines the USE_64_BIT_INT symbol, | |
7731 | and indicates that 64-bit integer types should be used | |
7732 | when available. The minimal possible 64-bitness | |
7733 | is employed, just enough to get 64-bit integers into Perl. | |
7734 | This may mean using for example "long longs", while your memory | |
7735 | may still be limited to 2 gigabytes. | |
7736 | ||
7737 | =item C<usecrosscompile> | |
7738 | ||
7739 | From F<Cross.U>: | |
7740 | ||
7741 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_CROSS_COMPILE> symbol, | |
7742 | and indicates that Perl has been cross-compiled. | |
7743 | ||
7744 | =item C<usedl> | |
7745 | ||
7746 | From F<dlsrc.U>: | |
7747 | ||
7748 | This variable indicates if the system supports dynamic | |
7749 | loading of some sort. See also dlsrc and dlobj. | |
7750 | ||
7751 | =item C<usefaststdio> | |
7752 | ||
7753 | From F<usefaststdio.U>: | |
7754 | ||
7755 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_FAST_STDIO> symbol, | |
7756 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use C<fast stdio>. | |
7757 | Defaults to define in Perls 5.8 and earlier, to undef later. | |
7758 | ||
7759 | =item C<useithreads> | |
7760 | ||
7761 | From F<usethreads.U>: | |
7762 | ||
7763 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_ITHREADS> symbol, | |
7764 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use the interpreter-based | |
7765 | threading implementation. | |
7766 | ||
7767 | =item C<uselargefiles> | |
7768 | ||
7769 | From F<uselfs.U>: | |
7770 | ||
7771 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_LARGE_FILES> symbol, | |
7772 | and indicates that large file interfaces should be used when | |
7773 | available. | |
7774 | ||
7775 | =item C<uselongdouble> | |
7776 | ||
7777 | From F<uselongdbl.U>: | |
7778 | ||
7779 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_LONG_DOUBLE> symbol, | |
7780 | and indicates that long doubles should be used when available. | |
7781 | ||
7782 | =item C<usemallocwrap> | |
7783 | ||
7784 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: | |
7785 | ||
7786 | This variable contains y if we are wrapping malloc to prevent | |
7787 | integer overflow during size calculations. | |
7788 | ||
7789 | =item C<usemorebits> | |
7790 | ||
7791 | From F<usemorebits.U>: | |
7792 | ||
7793 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_MORE_BITS> symbol, | |
7794 | and indicates that explicit 64-bit interfaces and long doubles | |
7795 | should be used when available. | |
7796 | ||
7797 | =item C<usemultiplicity> | |
7798 | ||
7799 | From F<usemultiplicity.U>: | |
7800 | ||
7801 | This variable conditionally defines the C<MULTIPLICITY> symbol, | |
7802 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use multiplicity. | |
7803 | ||
7804 | =item C<usemymalloc> | |
7805 | ||
7806 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: | |
7807 | ||
7808 | This variable contains y if the malloc that comes with this package | |
7809 | is desired over the system's version of malloc. People often include | |
7810 | special versions of malloc for effiency, but such versions are often | |
7811 | less portable. See also mallocsrc and mallocobj. | |
7812 | If this is C<y>, then -lmalloc is removed from $libs. | |
7813 | ||
7814 | =item C<usenm> | |
7815 | ||
7816 | From F<usenm.U>: | |
7817 | ||
7818 | This variable contains C<true> or C<false> depending whether the | |
7819 | nm extraction is wanted or not. | |
7820 | ||
7821 | =item C<useopcode> | |
7822 | ||
7823 | From F<Extensions.U>: | |
7824 | ||
7825 | This variable holds either C<true> or C<false> to indicate | |
7826 | whether the Opcode extension should be used. The sole | |
7827 | use for this currently is to allow an easy mechanism | |
7828 | for users to skip the Opcode extension from the Configure | |
7829 | command line. | |
7830 | ||
7831 | =item C<useperlio> | |
7832 | ||
7833 | From F<useperlio.U>: | |
7834 | ||
7835 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_PERLIO> symbol, | |
7836 | and indicates that the PerlIO abstraction should be | |
7837 | used throughout. | |
7838 | ||
7839 | =item C<useposix> | |
7840 | ||
7841 | From F<Extensions.U>: | |
7842 | ||
7843 | This variable holds either C<true> or C<false> to indicate | |
7844 | whether the C<POSIX> extension should be used. The sole | |
7845 | use for this currently is to allow an easy mechanism | |
7846 | for hints files to indicate that C<POSIX> will not compile | |
7847 | on a particular system. | |
7848 | ||
7849 | =item C<usereentrant> | |
7850 | ||
7851 | From F<usethreads.U>: | |
7852 | ||
7853 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_REENTRANT_API> symbol, | |
7854 | which indicates that the thread code may try to use the various | |
7855 | _r versions of library functions. This is only potentially | |
7856 | meaningful if usethreads is set and is very experimental, it is | |
7857 | not even prompted for. | |
7858 | ||
7859 | =item C<usesfio> | |
7860 | ||
7861 | From F<d_sfio.U>: | |
7862 | ||
7863 | This variable is set to true when the user agrees to use sfio. | |
7864 | It is set to false when sfio is not available or when the user | |
7865 | explicitely requests not to use sfio. It is here primarily so | |
7866 | that command-line settings can override the auto-detection of | |
7867 | d_sfio without running into a "WHOA THERE". | |
7868 | ||
7869 | =item C<useshrplib> | |
7870 | ||
7871 | From F<libperl.U>: | |
7872 | ||
7873 | This variable is set to C<true> if the user wishes | |
7874 | to build a shared libperl, and C<false> otherwise. | |
7875 | ||
7876 | =item C<usesocks> | |
7877 | ||
7878 | From F<usesocks.U>: | |
7879 | ||
7880 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_SOCKS> symbol, | |
7881 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use C<SOCKS>. | |
7882 | ||
7883 | =item C<usethreads> | |
7884 | ||
7885 | From F<usethreads.U>: | |
7886 | ||
7887 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_THREADS> symbol, | |
7888 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use threads. | |
7889 | ||
7890 | =item C<usevendorprefix> | |
7891 | ||
7892 | From F<vendorprefix.U>: | |
7893 | ||
7894 | This variable tells whether the vendorprefix | |
7895 | and consequently other vendor* paths are in use. | |
7896 | ||
7897 | =item C<usevfork> | |
7898 | ||
7899 | From F<d_vfork.U>: | |
7900 | ||
7901 | This variable is set to true when the user accepts to use vfork. | |
7902 | It is set to false when no vfork is available or when the user | |
7903 | explicitely requests not to use vfork. | |
7904 | ||
7905 | =item C<usrinc> | |
7906 | ||
7907 | From F<usrinc.U>: | |
7908 | ||
7909 | This variable holds the path of the include files, which is | |
7910 | usually F</usr/include>. It is mainly used by other Configure units. | |
7911 | ||
7912 | =item C<uuname> | |
7913 | ||
7914 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
7915 | ||
7916 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
7917 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
7918 | ||
7919 | =item C<uvoformat> | |
7920 | ||
7921 | From F<perlxvf.U>: | |
7922 | ||
7923 | This variable contains the format string used for printing | |
7924 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned octal integer. | |
7925 | ||
7926 | =item C<uvsize> | |
7927 | ||
7928 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
7929 | ||
7930 | This variable is the size of a C<UV> in bytes. | |
7931 | ||
7932 | =item C<uvtype> | |
7933 | ||
7934 | From F<perlxv.U>: | |
7935 | ||
7936 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's C<UV>. | |
7937 | ||
7938 | =item C<uvuformat> | |
7939 | ||
7940 | From F<perlxvf.U>: | |
7941 | ||
7942 | This variable contains the format string used for printing | |
7943 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned decimal integer. | |
7944 | ||
7945 | =item C<uvxformat> | |
7946 | ||
7947 | From F<perlxvf.U>: | |
7948 | ||
7949 | This variable contains the format string used for printing | |
7950 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned hexadecimal integer in lowercase abcdef. | |
7951 | ||
7952 | =item C<uvXUformat> | |
7953 | ||
7954 | From F<perlxvf.U>: | |
7955 | ||
7956 | This variable contains the format string used for printing | |
7957 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned hexadecimal integer in uppercase C<ABCDEF>. | |
7958 | ||
7959 | =back | |
7960 | ||
7961 | =head2 v | |
7962 | ||
7963 | =over 4 | |
7964 | ||
7965 | =item C<vendorarch> | |
7966 | ||
7967 | From F<vendorarch.U>: | |
7968 | ||
7969 | This variable contains the value of the C<PERL_VENDORARCH> symbol. | |
7970 | It may have a F<~> on the front. | |
7971 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
7972 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own | |
7973 | architecture-dependent modules and extensions in this directory with | |
7974 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor | |
7975 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
7976 | ||
7977 | =item C<vendorarchexp> | |
7978 | ||
7979 | From F<vendorarch.U>: | |
7980 | ||
7981 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorarch, so that you | |
7982 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. | |
7983 | ||
7984 | =item C<vendorbin> | |
7985 | ||
7986 | From F<vendorbin.U>: | |
7987 | ||
7988 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VENDORBIN> symbol. | |
7989 | It may have a F<~> on the front. | |
7990 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
7991 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place additional | |
7992 | binaries in this directory with | |
7993 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor | |
7994 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
7995 | ||
7996 | =item C<vendorbinexp> | |
7997 | ||
7998 | From F<vendorbin.U>: | |
7999 | ||
8000 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorbin, so that you | |
8001 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. | |
8002 | ||
8003 | =item C<vendorhtml1dir> | |
8004 | ||
8005 | From F<vendorhtml1dir.U>: | |
8006 | ||
8007 | This variable contains the name of the directory for html | |
8008 | pages. It may have a F<~> on the front. | |
8009 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
8010 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own | |
8011 | html pages in this directory with | |
8012 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor | |
8013 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
8014 | ||
8015 | =item C<vendorhtml1direxp> | |
8016 | ||
8017 | From F<vendorhtml1dir.U>: | |
8018 | ||
8019 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorhtml1dir, so that you | |
8020 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. | |
8021 | ||
8022 | =item C<vendorhtml3dir> | |
8023 | ||
8024 | From F<vendorhtml3dir.U>: | |
8025 | ||
8026 | This variable contains the name of the directory for html | |
8027 | library pages. It may have a F<~> on the front. | |
8028 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
8029 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own | |
8030 | html pages for modules and extensions in this directory with | |
8031 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor | |
8032 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
8033 | ||
8034 | =item C<vendorhtml3direxp> | |
8035 | ||
8036 | From F<vendorhtml3dir.U>: | |
8037 | ||
8038 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorhtml3dir, so that you | |
8039 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. | |
8040 | ||
8041 | =item C<vendorlib> | |
8042 | ||
8043 | From F<vendorlib.U>: | |
8044 | ||
8045 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VENDORLIB> symbol, | |
8046 | which is the name of the private library for this package. | |
8047 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
8048 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own | |
8049 | modules in this directory with | |
8050 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor | |
8051 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
8052 | ||
8053 | =item C<vendorlib_stem> | |
8054 | ||
8055 | From F<vendorlib.U>: | |
8056 | ||
8057 | This variable is $vendorlibexp with any trailing version-specific component | |
8058 | removed. The elements in inc_version_list (F<inc_version_list.U>) can | |
8059 | be tacked onto this variable to generate a list of directories to search. | |
8060 | ||
8061 | =item C<vendorlibexp> | |
8062 | ||
8063 | From F<vendorlib.U>: | |
8064 | ||
8065 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorlib, so that you | |
8066 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. | |
8067 | ||
8068 | =item C<vendorman1dir> | |
8069 | ||
8070 | From F<vendorman1dir.U>: | |
8071 | ||
8072 | This variable contains the name of the directory for man1 | |
8073 | pages. It may have a F<~> on the front. | |
8074 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
8075 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own | |
8076 | man1 pages in this directory with | |
8077 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor | |
8078 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
8079 | ||
8080 | =item C<vendorman1direxp> | |
8081 | ||
8082 | From F<vendorman1dir.U>: | |
8083 | ||
8084 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorman1dir, so that you | |
8085 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. | |
8086 | ||
8087 | =item C<vendorman3dir> | |
8088 | ||
8089 | From F<vendorman3dir.U>: | |
8090 | ||
8091 | This variable contains the name of the directory for man3 | |
8092 | pages. It may have a F<~> on the front. | |
8093 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
8094 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own | |
8095 | man3 pages in this directory with | |
8096 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor | |
8097 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
8098 | ||
8099 | =item C<vendorman3direxp> | |
8100 | ||
8101 | From F<vendorman3dir.U>: | |
8102 | ||
8103 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorman3dir, so that you | |
8104 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. | |
8105 | ||
8106 | =item C<vendorprefix> | |
8107 | ||
8108 | From F<vendorprefix.U>: | |
8109 | ||
8110 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below | |
8111 | which the vendor will install add-on packages. | |
8112 | See C<INSTALL> for usage and examples. | |
8113 | ||
8114 | =item C<vendorprefixexp> | |
8115 | ||
8116 | From F<vendorprefix.U>: | |
8117 | ||
8118 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below | |
8119 | which the vendor will install add-on packages. Derived from vendorprefix. | |
8120 | ||
8121 | =item C<vendorscript> | |
8122 | ||
8123 | From F<vendorscript.U>: | |
8124 | ||
8125 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VENDORSCRIPT> symbol. | |
8126 | It may have a F<~> on the front. | |
8127 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. | |
8128 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place additional | |
8129 | executable scripts in this directory with | |
8130 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor | |
8131 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. | |
8132 | ||
8133 | =item C<vendorscriptexp> | |
8134 | ||
8135 | From F<vendorscript.U>: | |
8136 | ||
8137 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorscript, so that you | |
8138 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. | |
8139 | ||
8140 | =item C<version> | |
8141 | ||
8142 | From F<patchlevel.U>: | |
8143 | ||
8144 | The full version number of this package, such as 5.6.1 (or 5_6_1). | |
8145 | This combines revision, patchlevel, and subversion to get the | |
8146 | full version number, including any possible subversions. | |
8147 | This is suitable for use as a directory name, and hence is | |
8148 | filesystem dependent. | |
8149 | ||
8150 | =item C<version_patchlevel_string> | |
8151 | ||
8152 | From F<patchlevel.U>: | |
8153 | ||
8154 | This is a string combining version, subversion and | |
8155 | perl_patchlevel (if perl_patchlevel is non-zero). | |
8156 | It is typically something like | |
8157 | 'version 7 subversion 1' or | |
8158 | 'version 7 subversion 1 patchlevel 11224' | |
8159 | It is computed here to avoid duplication of code in F<myconfig.SH> | |
8160 | and F<lib/Config.pm>. | |
8161 | ||
8162 | =item C<versiononly> | |
8163 | ||
8164 | From F<versiononly.U>: | |
8165 | ||
8166 | If set, this symbol indicates that only the version-specific | |
8167 | components of a perl installation should be installed. | |
8168 | This may be useful for making a test installation of a new | |
8169 | version without disturbing the existing installation. | |
8170 | Setting versiononly is equivalent to setting installperl's -v option. | |
8171 | In particular, the non-versioned scripts and programs such as | |
8172 | a2p, c2ph, h2xs, pod2*, and perldoc are not installed | |
8173 | (see C<INSTALL> for a more complete list). Nor are the man | |
8174 | pages installed. | |
8175 | Usually, this is undef. | |
8176 | ||
8177 | =item C<vi> | |
8178 | ||
8179 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
8180 | ||
8181 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
8182 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
8183 | ||
8184 | =item C<voidflags> | |
8185 | ||
8186 | From F<voidflags.U>: | |
8187 | ||
8188 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VOIDFLAGS> symbol, | |
8189 | which indicates how much support of the void type is given by this | |
8190 | compiler. See C<VOIDFLAGS> for more info. | |
8191 | ||
8192 | =back | |
8193 | ||
8194 | =head2 x | |
8195 | ||
8196 | =over 4 | |
8197 | ||
8198 | =item C<xlibpth> | |
8199 | ||
8200 | From F<libpth.U>: | |
8201 | ||
8202 | This variable holds extra path (space-separated) used to find | |
8203 | libraries on this platform, for example C<CPU>-specific libraries | |
8204 | (on multi-C<CPU> platforms) may be listed here. | |
8205 | ||
8206 | =back | |
8207 | ||
8208 | =head2 y | |
8209 | ||
8210 | =over 4 | |
8211 | ||
8212 | =item C<yacc> | |
8213 | ||
8214 | From F<yacc.U>: | |
8215 | ||
8216 | This variable holds the name of the compiler compiler we | |
8217 | want to use in the Makefile. It can be yacc, byacc, or bison -y. | |
8218 | ||
8219 | =item C<yaccflags> | |
8220 | ||
8221 | From F<yacc.U>: | |
8222 | ||
8223 | This variable contains any additional yacc flags desired by the | |
8224 | user. It is up to the Makefile to use this. | |
8225 | ||
8226 | =back | |
8227 | ||
8228 | =head2 z | |
8229 | ||
8230 | =over 4 | |
8231 | ||
8232 | =item C<zcat> | |
8233 | ||
8234 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
8235 | ||
8236 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. | |
8237 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. | |
8238 | ||
8239 | =item C<zip> | |
8240 | ||
8241 | From F<Loc.U>: | |
8242 | ||
8243 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the | |
8244 | full pathname (if any) of the zip program. After Configure runs, | |
8245 | the value is reset to a plain C<zip> and is not useful. | |
8246 | ||
8247 | ||
8248 | =back | |
8249 | ||
8250 | =head1 NOTE | |
8251 | ||
8252 | This module contains a good example of how to use tie to implement a | |
8253 | cache and an example of how to make a tied variable readonly to those | |
8254 | outside of it. | |
8255 | ||
8256 | =cut | |
8257 |